Nokia Solutions and Networks T6EQ1 SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Exhibit 8

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS Exhibit 8

Exhibit 8

Download: Nokia Solutions and Networks T6EQ1 SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Exhibit 8
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Nokia Solutions and Networks T6EQ1 SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Exhibit 8
Document ID486577
Application ID3Q8DJduqPwlwOkH6FVdqPw==
Document DescriptionExhibit 8
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize324.09kB (4051114 bits)
Date Submitted2004-11-08 00:00:00
Date Available2004-11-08 00:00:00
Creation Date2002-08-23 14:15:42
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Document Lastmod2002-08-23 14:15:45
Document TitleExhibit 8

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP
Manual
Software Release R16.1.x.x
800 and 1900 MHz
CDMA
English
Aug 2002
68P09255A57- 2
PRELIMINARY
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting
from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this
document has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for
inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the
right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person
of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product,
software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and
programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be
construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe
copyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in
the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including
the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.
Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this
instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express
written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either
directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement
only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the
software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT
designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems,
Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically
disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services
profiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright
 Copyright 2002 Motorola, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Printed on
Recyclable Paper
REV012501
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP
Manual
Table of Contents
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Contents
FCC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 15 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 68 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
xviii
xviii
xix
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope of This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA LMF Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Optimize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is Optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-5
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Site Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1-6
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-12
Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
BTS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Cabinet Internal FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
1-16
1-17
Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Power Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
1-26
Chapter 2 Power Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Prepower-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cellsite Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking for shorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
AC Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cabinet Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-6
2-7
DC Power Pre-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Cabinet Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
2-8
2-9
Battery Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
2-11
2-12
Heat Exchanger Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Chapter 3 Optimization/ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Basic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell-site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell-site Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS System Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
Configure Channel Service Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-8
3-12
3-12
LMF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA LMF Home Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folder Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log into and out of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-16
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download Files to the LMF - Master-bts-cdma Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create BTS Specific CDF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version and Site Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Antenna Mapping Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
....................................................................................
3-22
3-22
3-25
3-25
3-26
3-26
Operating the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging into a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing an MMI Communication Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Download Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-35
3-35
3-36
System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
iii
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Synchronization Manager System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR/HSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Frequency Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LORAN-C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-40
3-41
Calibration and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Connection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Cable Calibration Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-up for TX Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-up for Optimization/ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX ATP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-50
3-51
3-53
3-53
3-53
3-55
3-59
3-65
Loss/Gain Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Coupler Loss Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-67
3-67
3-67
3-67
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-69
3-70
3-70
3-71
3-73
3-73
3-74
Adjusting for loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Calibrate BLOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLO Calibration Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download BLO Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-76
3-78
3-78
3-81
3-82
3-82
3-82
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-86
3-87
iv
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-41
3-43
3-47
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
RFDS TSU NAM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valid NAM Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-89
3-89
3-90
3-90
3-91
3-92
3-93
3-94
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Reporting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure
(Six Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-96
3-96
3-96
3-97
3-97
3-97
3-98
3-98
3-98
3-99
3-99
3-100
3-102
Before Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-103
Chapter 4 Automated Test Procedures (ATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
ATP Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX/RX OUT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA 2000 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Tx Mask Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Rho Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Code Domain Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: FER Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-11
Chapter 5 Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Initializing Active Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-5
5-7
5-7
5-7
6-1
6-2
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward link problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-CCP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail on a single antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI3, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI3 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI3 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems
(No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Operation Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-22
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix B ATP Matrix Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix C BBX Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX Gain Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix D CDMA Operating Frequency Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
A-15
A-17
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
B-1
B-2
B-2
B-2
C-1
C-2
C-2
D-1
Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
D-2
D-2
D-3
D-4
D-5
Appendix E PN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
PN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-2
E-2
E-2
Appendix F Test Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Test Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
F-2
F-2
F-6
F-6
F-7
F-7
F-7
F-10
F-10
F-11
F-12
F-16
F-19
Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-21
Appendix G Power Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
Calibrating Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-2
G-2
G-2
vii
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Power Delta Calibration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8935 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
G-3
G-4
G-7
G-9
G-11
Appendix H Cable Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
Intra-Cabinet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-CCP Cables and Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Cabinet LPA Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAC Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Cabling Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50 Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Cabinet Parts Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-2
H-2
H-5
H-8
H-12
H-13
H-14
H-16
H-21
H-23
H-25
H-28
H-32
Appendix I GPIB Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-1
GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232 GPIB Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
I-2
I-2
I-3
I-4
I-4
I-6
I-7
I-8
I-8
I-9
I-11
I-12
Appendix J Downloading ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-1
Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Procedure - Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix K Companion Frame Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing the Companion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing the TX section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing the RX section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
J-2
J-2
K-1
K-2
K-2
K-3
Index-1
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-17
Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
Figure 1-8: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
Figure 1-9: Power Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27Vdc Terminal Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Figure 3-6: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42
Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A . . .
3-54
Figure 3-9: Cable Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562
3-55
Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and
Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56
Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57
Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567
(IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown - CyberTest and Advantest R3465 .
3-59
Figure 3-14: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
Figure 3-15: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61
Figure 3-16: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
Figure 3-17: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
ix
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
Figure 3-19: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS) . . .
3-65
Figure 3-20: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS) . . . . .
3-66
Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-72
Figure 3-22: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-73
Figure 3-23: Battery Over-temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-101
Figure 3-24: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-102
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
Figure 6-2: GLI3 Front Panel Operating Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
D-4
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium . . .
F-3
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium . . . . . . . . .
F-5
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-8
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-9
Figure F-5: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-11
Figure F-6: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-15
Figure F-7: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-18
Figure F-8: Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-19
Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-21
Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-6
Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-7
Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-8
Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-8
Figure G-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-11
Figure G-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-11
Figure G-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-13
Figure G-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-14
Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-4
Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-6
Figure H-3: C-CCP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-7
Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-8
Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-9
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-10
Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-11
Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-12
Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-13
Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-15
Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-17
Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-18
Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-19
Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-20
Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-22
Figure H-16: RFDS Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-23
Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-25
Figure H-18: 50 Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-27
Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-32
Figure I-1: HP437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
Figure I-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-3
Figure I-3: HP8935 Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-5
Figure I-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-7
Figure I-5: R3465 Communications Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-8
Figure I-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-8
Figure I-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-9
Figure I-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-10
Figure I-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-12
Figure I-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-13
Figure K-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector) .
K-2
Figure K-2: WinLMF Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-4
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
xi
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
List of Tables
xii
FCC Part 68 Registered Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Table 1-6: Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Table 2-4: Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Table 3-7: Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Table 3-8: Logging into the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Table 3-9: Downloading Site Specific BTS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loads . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Table 3-11: Create BTS Specific CDF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Table 3-12: Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Table 3-13: Update Antenna Mapping Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
Table 3-14: BTS GUI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Table 3-15: BTS CLI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
Table 3-16: BTS GUI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
Table 3-17: BTS CLI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
Table 3-18: Establishing MMI Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
Table 3-19: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35
Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35
Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
Table 3-22: Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-23: Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39
Table 3-24: Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41
Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43
Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-47
Table 3-28: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51
Table 3-29: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
Table 3-30: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-68
Table 3-31: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-69
Table 3-32: Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-69
Table 3-33: Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71
Table 3-34: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71
Table 3-35: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
3-73
Table 3-36: Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74
Table 3-37: Setting Coupler Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74
Table 3-38: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-76
Table 3-39: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-77
Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-78
Table 3-41: BTS TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80
Table 3-42: Download BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-82
Table 3-43: BTS TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
Table 3-44: All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
Table 3-45: Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
Table 3-47: Definition of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-89
Table 3-48: Valid NAM Field Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-90
Table 3-49: Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91
Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91
Table 3-51: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Table 3-52: RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-94
Table 3-53: Program NAM Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-95
Table 3-54: Heat Exchanger Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-97
Table 3-55: Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-97
Table 3-56: AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-97
Table 3-57: Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-98
Table 3-58: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-98
Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-98
Table 3-60: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-99
Table 3-61: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-99
Table 3-62: Battery Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-100
Table 3-63: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-102
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
xiii
Table of Contents
xiv
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-64: Check Before Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-103
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-7: LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-16: No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
Table 6-17: No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI3s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Table 6-18: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Table 6-19: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Table 6-20: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-2: Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A57-2
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
Table A3a: Pre-power Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5
Table A3b: Pre-power Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-9
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) . .
A-10
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . .
A-11
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels) . . . . . .
A-12
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) . . . . . .
A-15
Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17
Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17
Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-18
Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-3
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-5
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium .
F-2
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium . . .
F-4
Table F-3: System Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-12
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-16
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-19
Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-21
Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-3
Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-5
Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-7
Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-9
Table G-5: In-Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-15
Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-2
Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table . . .
H-23
Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table . . .
H-24
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-28
Table I-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
xv
Table of Contents
xvi
68P09255A57-2
Table I-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-3
Table I-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-4
Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-4
Table I-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-6
Table I-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-7
Table I-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-9
Table I-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-11
Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-12
Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-3
Table K-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-2
Table K-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-3
Table K-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-3
Table K-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-3
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
FCC Requirements
FCC Requirements
Content
This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the
SC4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base Transceiver
Stations.
FCC Part 15 Requirements
Part 15.19a(3) - INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Part 15.21 - INFORMATION TO USER
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola
could void your authority to operate the equipment.
15.105(b) - INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
xvii
FCC Requirements
68P09255A57-2
FCC Part 68 Requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visible
with the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for this
equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the
telephone company.
FCC Part 68 Registered Devices
Device
FCC Part 68 ID
Group Line Interface (GLI3) See Note
US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X
Cisco Model 1900-27 Router
US: 5B1DDNDN0006
ADC KENTROX Model 537
US: F81USA-31217-DE-N
NOTE
The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3,
< US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>, and may be used in conjunction with
one or both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered
CSU device not listed above.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If
this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that
you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted
service.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of
service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is
necessary.
If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please
contact:
Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)
1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
Phone Number: (847) 632-5390
for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair
this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or
user-serviceable parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could
void your authority to operate this equipment.
xviii
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Foreword
68P09255A57-2
Foreword
Scope of manual
This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system
craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system
equipment and ancillary devices.
This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment
training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or
enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
Obtaining Manuals
To view, download, order manuals (original or revised), visit the
Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at http://services.motorola.com,
or contact your Motorola account representative.
If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printing
date, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but a
different revision character.
Text conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out
information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the
surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.
The three categories of these special paragraphs are:
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you can
use. Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid
an undesirable situation or provides additional information
to help you understand a topic or concept.
CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation in which equipment
damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.
WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous
situation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.
The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of
software information:
 In text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style
without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to
name a command.
 In text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the
system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
 In command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those
parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and
typewriter style characters represent command output responses
as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
 In the command format of the command definition, typewriter
style characters represent the command parameters.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
xix
Foreword
68P09255A57-2
Reporting manual errors
To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network
Resolution Center) and provide the following information to enable
CNRC to open an MR (Modification Request):
- the document type
- the manual title, part number, and revision character
- the page number(s) with the error
- a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals.
Contact us
Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email
address below:
cdma.documentation@motorola.com
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.
Manual banner definitions
A banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,
PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in the
manual is not yet approved for general customer use.
24-hour support service
If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, please
contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for immediate
assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:
NA CNRC
EMEA CNRC
ASPAC CNRC
Japan & Korea CNRC
LAC CNRC
+1-800-433-5202
+44- (0) 1793-565444
+86-10-88417733
+81-3-5463-3550
+51-1-212-4020
For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola account
representative.
xx
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
General Safety
68P09255A57-2
General Safety
Remember! . . . Safety
depends on you!!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in
this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow
these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged
into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a
three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact
adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an
electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and
mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
NOTE
Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations 68P81150E62.
Do not operate in an explosive
atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment
constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:
 not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service
Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove
equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component
replacement, or any internal adjustment.
 not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
removed.
 always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
xxi
General Safety
68P09255A57-2
Use caution when exposing or
handling the CRT
Breakage of the Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity
scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,
avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be
handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety
mask and gloves.
Do not substitute parts or
modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Dangerous procedure
warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous
procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the
warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety
precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment
in your operating environment.
WARNING
xxii
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and
adjusting.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Revision History
68P09255A57-2
Revision History
Manual Number
68P09255A57- 2
Manual Title
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
Version Information
The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and
remarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shown
to the side) identify material which has changed from the previous
release of this publication.
Version
Level
Date of Issue
Mar 2002
Preliminary manual submitted for engineering markup
Jul 2002
LMF software updates. Preliminary manual submitted for DV&V
evaluation
Aug 2002
Remarks
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
xxiii
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-1
Introduction
68P09255A57-2
Introduction
Scope of This Document
This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and
audit tests of Motorola SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)
equipment frames equipped with trunked high-power Linear Power
Amplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.
Also covered is software release 2.16.1.X and can support the following
versions of SC 4812ET BTS sites:
- 1X Packet Backhaul BTS
- 1X Circuit BTS
- 1X Packet backhaul BTS
The 1X packet BTS has a packet backhaul network interface which
provided via a pair of external routers together with a GLI upgrade
(GLI3) that can handle voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data (IS-95B, 1X).
This BTS equipment is configured with all 1X cards (BBX-1X
andMCC1X) or a mix of 1X cards and non-1X cards (BBX2 and
MCC8E/24E). This configuration is compliant with all applicable
cdma2000 1X specifications. It provides the forward link and reverse
link RF functions to support 2G features and 3G-1X features (i.e., high
capacity voice & high bit rate data).
The 1X circuit BTS has a split backhaul (circuit/packet pipe) network
interface that can handle circuit based voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data
(IS-95B) as well as packet based data (1X).
This document assumes the following prerequisites: The BTS frames
and cabling have been installed per the BTS Hardware Installation
Manual which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC series
equipment frames, and the specific cabling configurations.
Document Composition
This document covers the following major areas:
 Introduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such
as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be
considered by the Cell Site Field Engineer (CFE) before optimization
or tests are performed.
 Preliminary Operations, consisting of cabinet power up and power
down procedures.
 Optimization/calibration, covering topics of Local Maintenance
Facility (LMF) connection to the BTS equipment, Global Positioning
System (GPS) Verification, test equipment setup, downloading all
BTS processor boards, RF path verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO)
calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency Diagnostic
System (RFDS) calibration.
 Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs), consisting of ATP tests executed
by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit (TX) and
receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment.
 Preparing to leave the site, presents instructions on how to properly
exit customer site, ensure that all equipment is operating properly, and
all work is complete according to Motorola guidelines.
1-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Introduction
68P09255A57-2
 Basic troubleshooting, consisting of procedures for installation,
calibration, transmit and receive tests, backplane problems, GPS
failures, and module connectors.
 Appendices contain pertinent Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset,
frequency programming, output power data tables, data sheets that are
filled out manually by the CFE at the site, an optimization/ATP test
matrix, BBX gain set point information, CDMA operating frequency
information, PN Offset programminginformation, information on test
equipment preparation, manual cable calibration procedures, power
Delta calibration procedures, RF cabinet interconnect cable
information, procedures for checking changing GPIB addresses, and
proceduress for downloading ROM Code from the LMF.
CDMA LMF Product Description
The Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) LMF is a graphical user
interface (GUI) based LMF. This product is specifically designed to
provide cellular communications field personnel the vehicle to support
the following CDMA BTS operations:
Installation
Maintenance
Calibration
Optimization
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
cannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help
from the menu bar.
Why Optimize?
Proper optimization and calibration assures:
 Accurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.
 Accurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.
What Is Optimization?
Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal
equipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexer
assemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of the
BTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that the
combined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and
built-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causing
improper site operation.
Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive and
transmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.
 The RX path starts at the ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX
directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the RX input port
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-3
Introduction
68P09255A57-2
on the rear of the frame, through the DDRCs, Multicoupler Preselector
Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry, ending at a CDMA
Channel Processor (C-CCP) backplane Broad Band Transceiver
(BBX) slot in the C-CCP shelf.
 A transmit path starts at the BBX, through the C-CCP backplane slot,
travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the rear of
the input/output (I/O) Panel. If the RFDS option is added, then the
TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directional
coupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipment
frame.
1-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Introduction
68P09255A57-2
These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leaving
only site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics
to be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated
Power (ERP) output power requirements.
Each C-CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TX
antenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs
1-12, and is optimized to all antenna ports). A single value is generated
for each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would
occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of
each element in the path.
When to Optimize
New Installations
After the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.
This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power
up, and GPS verification. Basic alarm tests are also addressed.
A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths is performed to verify factory
calibration.
A series of ATP CDMA verification tests are covered using the actual
equipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site can be placed
in service.
Site Expansion
Optimization is also required after expansion of a site.
Periodic Optimization
Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the
requirements of the overall system.
Repaired Sites
Verify repair(s) made to the BTS by consulting an Optimization/ATP
Test Matrix table. This table outlines the specific tests that must be
performed anytime a BTS subassembly or RF cable associated with it is
replaced.
NOTE
Aug 2002
Refer to Appendix B for detailed basic guideline tables and
detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-5
Documentation
68P09255A57-2
Documentation
Site Documents
The following documents are required to perform optimization of the
cell site equipment:
 Site document (generated by Motorola systems engineering), which
includes:
- General site information
- Floor plans
- Power levels
- Site PN
- Site paging and traffic channel allocation
- Board placement
- Site wiring lists
- Cell-site Data Files (CDF)
 Demarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)
 Equipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment.
Product Documentation
For other information, refer to the following manuals:
CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide; 68P64114A78
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93
CDMA RFDS User’s Guide
Equipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipment
SC4812ET Field Replacable Units Guide Motorola part number
68P09253A48
 SC 4812ET RF & Power Cabinet Hardware Installation Manual
Motorola part number 68P09253A94
 LMF CLI Commands R16.X Motorola part number 68P09253A56
1-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Test Equipment
Overview
The LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended test
equipment, and it is a part of a “calibrated test set.” To ensure consistent,
reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended test
equipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTS
equipment. Table 1-1 outlines the supported test equipment that meets the
technical criteria required for BTS optimization.
Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table
Item
Description
Hewlett Packard, model
HP 8921A
Cellular communications analyzer (includes
83203B CDMA interface option)
Agilent E4406A Analyzer
with Agilent E4432B
Generator
Used for both IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000
testings
Advantest R3267 Analyzer
with Advantest R3562
Generator
Used for both IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000
testings
Hewlett Packard, model
HP 83236A
PCS interface for PCS band
Hewlett Packard, model HP
8935
Cellular communications analyzer
Motorola CyberTest
Cellular communications analyzer
Advantest R3465 with 3561
CDMA option
Cellular communications analyzer
Gigatronix 8541C
Power meter
HP437B
Power meter
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,
test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used to
optimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute test
equipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMF
meeting the same technical specifications.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-7
Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
LMF Hardware Requirements
An LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (or
better) is recommended:
Notebook computer
266 MHz (32-bit CPU) Pentium processor
4 GB internal hard disk drive
Color display with 1024 x 768 pixel resolution and capability to
display more than 256 colors
 Memory requirements:
- Minimum required RAM: 96 MB
- Recommended RAM:
- 128 MB for Windows 98 SE
- 256 MB for Windows 2000
CD ROM drive and 3 1/2 inch floppy drive
56 kbps V.90Modem
Serial port (COM 1)
Parallel port (LPT 1)
PCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)
with a 10Base-T-to-coax adapter
 Windows 98SE operating system or Windows 2000 operating system
NOTE
If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window must be
maximized after it is displayed.
Test Equipment Guidelines
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,
test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used to
optimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute test
equipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMF
meeting the same technical specifications.
NOTE
During manual testing, you can substitute test equipment with
other test equipment models not supported by the LMF, but
those models must meet the same technical specifications.
The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurement
variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced
as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or
troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on hand
and operating properly.
Test Equipment Calibration
Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment
service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.
Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended
maintenance and calibration schedules closely.
1-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Test Cable Calibration
Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorola
recommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test
cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss
within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable
insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.
Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMF
during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test
cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the
characterization information prior to field optimization.
Equipment Warm-up
After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and
turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as
possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed-up for
a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDS
calibration procedures.
 Communications test set
 Rubidium time base
 Power meter
Test Equipment List
The following pieces of test equipment are required during the
optimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers and
frame keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manual
on all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand their
individual operation prior to use in optimization.
NOTE
Always refer to specific OEM test equipment documentation for
detailed operating instructions.
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter
Ethernet LAN transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCPQ1700)
 PCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP adapter: 3COM model Etherlink III 3C589B
Transition Engineering model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2
converter
NOTE
Xircom model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to
interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.
RS-232 to GPIB Interface
 National Instruments GPIB-232-CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X
RS232 serial null modem cable (see Figure 1-1) or equivalent; used to
interface the LMF to the test equipment.
 Standard RS-232 cable can be used with the following modifications:
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-9
Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
- This solution passes only the three minimum electrical connections
between the LMF and the GPIB interface. The control signals are
jumpered as enabled on both ends of the RS-232 cable (9-pin D).
TX and RX signals are crossed as null modem effect. Pin 5 is the
ground reference.
- Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together on
each connector.
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail
9-PIN D-FEMALE
GND
RX
TX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
9-PIN D-FEMALE
ON BOTH CONNECTORS
SHORT PINS 7, 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6
GND
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
FW00362
Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit
 Motorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on
opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null
modem transformation between cables. This board can used for
10-pin to 8-pin, 25-pin to 25-pin and 10-pin to 10-pin conversions.
 Motorola 30-09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent ; used to interface
the LMF serial port connection to GLI3, CSM and LPA debug serial
ports.
 25 pin D to 25 pin D serial cable from PC to null modem board.
Communications System Analyzer
The communication system analyzer is used during optimization and
testing of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment and
provides the following functions:
(1) Frequency counter
(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)
(3) RF Signal generator (capable of CDMA modulation)
(4) Spectrum analyzer
(5) CDMA code domain analyzer
The following types of communication system analyzers are currently
supported by the LMF:
 HP8921A/600 Analyzer - Including 83203B CDMA Interface,
manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCS Interface for 1900
MHz BTSs.
 Advantest R3465 Analyzer - Including R3561L test source unit
Advantest R3267 Analyzer - Including R3562 test source unit
Agilent E4406A Analyzer - including E4432 test source unit
HP8935 Analyzer
CyberTest Communication Analyzer
GPIB Cables
 Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) long
used to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.
1-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Power Meter
One of the following power meters is required for TX calibration and
audit if an HP8921A or Advantest R3465 analyzer is used:
 Hewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensor
 Gigatronix model 8541C with model 80601A power sensor
Timing Reference Cables
 Two BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 ft.) long,
used to interconnect the HP8921A/600 or Advantest R3465
communications analyzer to the CSM front panel timing references in
the BTS.
NOTE
Two Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent;
right angle MCX-male to standard BNC-male RG316 cables;
3m long are required to interconnect the HP8921A/600
communications analyzer to SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A
CSM board timing references.
 BNC “T” adapter with 50 ohm termination.
NOTE
This BNC “T” adapter (with 50 ohm termination) is required to
connect between the HP 8921A/600 (or Advantest R3465)
EVEN SECOND/SYNC IN and the BNC cable. The BNC cable
leads to the 2-second clock connection on the TIB. Erroneous
test results may occur if the “T” adapter with the 50 ohm
termination is not connected.
Digital Multimeter
 Fluke model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision DC and AC measurements, requiring 4-1/2 digits.
Directional Coupler
 Narda model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01) coupler
terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.
RF Attenuators
 20 dB fixed attenuators, 20 W (Narda 768-20); used with test cable
calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.
 Narda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01) coupler
terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.
Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etc
 As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for
various test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (type
N) for calibration and one RF short, two N-type female-to-female
adapters.
High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap
 Motorola model 42-80385A59; used to prevent damage from
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with
modules.
RF Load (at least three for trunked cabinets)
 100 W non-radiating RF load; used (as required) to provide dummy
RF loading during BTS transmit tests.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-11
Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
RF Network Box (and calibrated cables)
 Motorola model SGLN5531A 18:3 Passive Antenna Interface used to
interface test equipment to the BTS receive and transmit antenna
inputs during optimization/ATP or general troubleshooting
procedures.
Optional Equipment
Frequency Counter
 Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.
Spectrum Analyzer
 Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or
equivalent; required for tests other than standard Receive band spectral
purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed by the
LMF.
Local Area Network (LAN) Tester
 Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.
Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment
 As required for local application
RF Test Cable (if not Provided with Test Equipment)
 Motorola model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the
BTS transmitter output during optimization or during general
troubleshooting procedures.
Oscilloscope
 Tektronics model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,
and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.
2-way Splitter
 Mini-Circuits model ZFSC-2-2500 or equivalent; provide the
diversity receive input to the BTS
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
 Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM
and Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)
frequency verification.
1-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Abbreviations and Acronyms
68P09255A57-2
Abbreviations and Acronyms
Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
ACLC
ASU
AMR
ATP
BBX
BLO
BTS
CBSC
C-CCP
CCD
cdf
CDMA
CE
CHI
CLI
CIO
CMR
CSM
CSU
DBPF
DBM
DLM
DMAC
DRDC
DSP
EMPC
FRU
FSI
FWTIC
GFCI
GLI 2
GPS
GUI
HSO
IFM
I&Q
ISB
Aug 2002
Definition
AC Load Center
Antenna Selection Unit
Alarm Monitor Reporting
Acceptance Test Plan
Broadband Transceiver
Bay Level Offset
Base Transceiver Subsystem
Centralized Base Station Controller
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
CDMA Clock Distribution
command data file
Code Division Multiple Access
Channel Element
Concentration Highway Interface
Command Line Interface
Combiner Input/Output
Cellular Manual Revision
Clock Synchronization Manager
Clock Synchronization Unit
Dual Bandpass Filter
Debug Monitor
Download Manager
Digital Metering and Alarm Control (also see MAP)
Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional Coupler
Digital Signal Processor
Expansion Multicoupler Preselector Card
Field Replaceable Unit
Frame Status Indicator
Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card
Ground Fault Connection Interrupt
Group Line Interface II
Global Positioning System
Graphical User Interface
High Stability Oscillator
Integrated Frame Modem
Interphase and Quadrature
InterShelf Bus
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-13
Abbreviations and Acronyms
68P09255A57-2
Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
LAPD
LFR
LMF
LORAN
LPA
MAP
MCC
MGLI
MM
MMI
MPC
oos
OMCR
PC
PDA
PN
QPSK
RFDS
RGPS
RSSI
SCAP
TCH
TCP
TMPC
TSIC
TSI
1-14
Definition
Link Access Protocol “D”
LORAN-C Frequency Receiver
Local Maintenance Facility
LOng RAnge Navigational
Linear Power Amplifier
Meter Alarm Panel (also refered to as DMAC)
Multi-Channel CDMA
Master Group Line Interface
Mobility Manager
Man Machine Interface
Multicoupler Preselector Card
Out-of-Service
Operations Maintenance Center - Radio
Personal Communication System
Personal Communication System Controller
Pseudo-random Noise
Quadrature Phase Shift Keyed
Radio Frequency Diagnostic Subsystem
Remote Global Positioning System
Received Signal Strength Indicator
Super Cell Application Protocol
Traffic Channel
Traffic Channel
Traffic Channel
Traffic Channel
Time Slot Interchanger
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
BTS Overview
68P09255A57-2
BTS Overview
The SC 4812ET BTS consists of an RF Cabinet that is an outdoor,
weatherized version of the SC 4812T. The RF cabinet is powered by
27 Vdc and each cabinet has the capability to support up to 4 carriers (at
3 sector) or 2 carriers (at 6 sector).
The RF Cabinet houses the fan modules, C-CCP, LPA modules, LPA
trunking backplane, Bandpass 2:1 & 4:1 Combiners, Duplexer/Receive
Filter/Directional Couplers (DRDC) and a DC Power distribution
assembly. The Power Cabinet (PC) provides +27 Vdc distribution and
battery backup for the SC 4812ET. The Power Cabinet houses batteries,
battery heaters, rectifiers, an AC Load Center (ACLC), a power
distribution assembly, and two duplexed GFCI convenience outlets.
C-CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers
All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a
single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers
dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to
Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 for specific C-CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.
Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)
Frame
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
Power Power Power AMR GLI3
(PS-1) (PS-2) (PS-3)
-1
-1
MCC
BBX
BBX
-R
MPC/
EMPC
-1
R1
101
101
101
101
102
103
104
105
106
101
102
103
104
105
106
R101
201
201
201
201
202
203
204
205
206
201
202
203
204
205
206
R201
301
301
301
301
302
303
304
305
306
301
302
303
304
305
306
R301
Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)
Frame
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
HSO/ CSM CSM CCD CCD
LFR
-1
-2
AMR GLI3-2
MCC
10
11
12
10
MPC/
EMPC
-2
12
101
101
102
102
102
107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112
201
201
202
202
102
207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212
301
301
302
302
102
307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
11
SW
Aug 2002
BBX
1-15
BTS Overview
68P09255A57-2
Major Components
The major components that make up the Motorola SC 4812ET are
illustrated in this section: the RF Cabinet (see Figure 1-2) and the Power
Cabinet (see Figure 1-9).
Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
RF I/O
Area Cover Plate
Main Door
Rear Conduit Panel
LPA Door
(Can only be opened after Main Door is open)
Rear DC Conduit Panel
Rear I/O Door
FW00189
1-16
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
BTS Overview
68P09255A57-2
RF Cabinet Internal FRUs
Figure 1-3 shows the location of the Internal Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in the
following paragraphs.
Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal FRUs
EBA
ETIB
CCP Fans
RFDS
C-CCP Shelf
5 RU Rack Space
Combiner
Cage
OPTIONAL AREA
DC
Power
Dist.
Punch
Block
(back)
Circuit
Breaker Panel
DRDC
LPA Trunking
Backplane
LPAs
FW00163
Duplexer/RX Filter Directional Coupler
The DRDC combines, in a single module, the functions of antenna
duplexing, receive band pass filtering, and surge protection (see
Figure 1-7).
Combiner Cage (2:1, 4:1, or Band pass Filter)
The Combiner Cage holds the transmit band pass filters, 2:1 combiners,
or 4:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-17
BTS Overview
68P09255A57-2
Combined CDMA Channel Processor Shelf
The C-CCP shelf contains the following (see Figure 1-4):
 High Stability Oscillator (HSO) or Low Frequency Receiver (LFR)
card (1)
 Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) cards (2)
 CDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)
 Power Supply cards (2 minimum, 3 maximum)
 Multicoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) or Expansion Multicoupler
Preselector Cards (EMPC) (2)
 Alarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)
 Multi Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24E or MCC-1X) cards (up to
12)
 Broadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cards (up to 13)
 Combined Input/Output (CIO) card (1)
 Group Line Interface (GLI3) cards (2)
 BBX Switch card (1)
 Modem (optional)
 Filler Panels (as required)
 Fan Module (3)
Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf
SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
ETIB
EBA
MPC/EMPC-1
5 RU RACK
SPACE
MPC/EMPC-2
Switch
BBX2-12
BBX2-1 1
BBX2-10
BBX2-9
BBX2-8
BBX2-7
MCC24-12
MCC24-1 1
MCC24-10
MCC24-9
MCC24-8
MCC24-7
GLI3
AMR
MODEM
CCD
CSM
CSM
HSO/LFR
CCD
CIO
BBX2-6
BBX2-R
BBX2-5
BBX2-4
BBX2-3
BBX2-2
BBX2-1
MCC24-6
MCC24-5
MCC24-4
MCC24-3
MCC24-2
GLI3
MCC24-1
AMR
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
19 mm Filter Panel
RFDS
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC8Es, MCC24Es
or MCC-1Xs. BBXs
may be BBX2s or
BBX-1Xs.
REF FW00304
Punch Block
The Punch Block is the interface point of the RF Cabinet between the
T1/E1 span lines, the Customer I/O, alarms, multi-cabinet timing
(RGPS and HSO), and Pilot Beacon control (optional). (see Figure 1-6).
1-18
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
BTS Overview
68P09255A57-2
Span I/O Board
The Span I/O Board provides the interface for the span lines from the
CSU to the C-CCP backplane (see Figure 1-6).
RF Diagnostic Subsystem
The RFDS provides the capability for remotely monitoring the status of
the SC 4812ET RF Transmit and Receive paths (Figure 1-7).
Heat Exchanger
The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the internal compartment of the
RF Cabinet. The fan speed of the heat exchangers adjusts automatically
with temperature. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front
door of the RF Cabinet.
SC 4812ET Interface Board (ETIB) & LPA Control Brd
(LPAC)
The ETIB is an interconnect board showing status LEDs for the RF
Cabinet, as well as providing secondary surge protection. The LPAC
board provides the interface for the LPA connection.
SC 4812ET Trunking Backplane
The Trunking Backplane contains a complex passive RF network that
allows RF signals to share the resources of a bank of four LPAs. It also
provides DC Power and digital interconnect.
Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View)
RF CABINET
(Rear View)
Exp. Punch
Block
RF Expansion
Punch
Block
Microwave
27V
RF GPS
RFDS Expansion
1-3 Sector Antennas
27V Ret
LAN
4-6 Sector Antennas
2 Sec Tick
RF CABINET
(Rear Door closed)
19 MHz Clock
FW00147
Ground Cable
Lugs
Expansion 1
Expansion 2
Aug 2002
DC Conduit
RGPS
RFGPS
Pilot Beacon
Span/Alarm
SPAN I/O
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-19
BTS Overview
68P09255A57-2
Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram
20 Pair
Punchblock
(RGPS)
1A
2A
3A
1B
2B
3B
4A
5A
6A
4B
5B
6B
50 Pair
Punch
Block
(Alarms/Spans)
RGD/RGPS
2A
3A
1B
Power Input
+27V
Microwave
RF Expansion Ports
1A
RGD
Board
RF
GPS
2B
LAN
3B
IN OUT
Remote
ASU
4A
5A
6A
4B
5B
6B
19 MHz
Spans
Modem
Alams
Antenna’s
Power Input
27V Ret
2 Sec
GND
Lugs
FW00171
1-20
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
BTS Overview
68P09255A57-2
Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
FRONT VIEW
RFDS
(door not shown for clarity)
WALL
MOUNTING
BRACKET
DRDC
BTS
CPLD
ANT
CPLD
3B 2B 1B 3A 2A 1A
DRDC CAGE
6B 5B 4B 6A 5A 4A
FW00170
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-21
Sector Configuration
68P09255A57-2
Sector Configuration
There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5
outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater than
two, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,
bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on
sectorization and channel sequencing.
Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration
Number of
carriers
Number of
sectors
3 or 6
Channel spacing
Filter requirements
N/A
Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
Non-adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)
Adjacent
Dual Band Pass Filter
Non-adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
Adjacent
Bandpass Filter
3,4
Non-adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
3,4
Adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)
The matrix in Table 1-6 shows a correlation between the various sector
configurations and BBX cards.
NOTE
1-22
In Table 1-6, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Sector Configuration
68P09255A57-2
Table 1-6: Sector Configurations
Config Ref. No.
Description
3-Sector/2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavity
combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6
total).
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
6-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity
combiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
3-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity
combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
N/A
N/A
N/A
3-Sector/4-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners
for 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
3-Sector / 2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for
3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
3-Sector/3 or 4-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 4:1
cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non-adjacent channels.
Aug 2002
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
N/A
N/A
N/A
6-Sector/1-Carrier - The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavity
combiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-23
Sector Configuration
68P09255A57-2
Figure 1-8: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
2 to 1 Combiner
3 Sector or 6 Sector
4 to 1 Combiner
3 Sector Only
EBA
ETIB
EBA
ETIB
RFDS
RFDS
C1, S1-S3
C1
(C1, S1-S3)
C2, S1-S3
C2
(C2, S1-S3)
5 RU RACK
SPACE
5 RU RACK
SPACE
C3, S1-S3
C3
(C1, S4-S6)
C4, S1-S3
C4
(C2, S4-S6)
Dual Bandpass Filter
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
3 Sector 2 Carrier Maximum
6 Sector 1 Carrier Maximum
EBA
ETIB
RFDS
C1, S1-S3
(C1, S1-S3)
C2, S1-S3
(C2, S1-S3)
5 RU RACK
SPACE
C3, S1-S3
(C1, S4-S6)
C4, S1-S3
(C2, S4-S6)
REF. FW00166
1-24
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Power Cabinet
68P09255A57-2
Power Cabinet
Figure 1-9 illustrates the Power Cabinet design.
Figure 1-9: Power Cabinet
GFCI Outlet
Cover
Battery Door
Rear I/O
Door
Rear DC
Conduit Panel
Main Door
Rear AC Conduit
Panel
FW00193
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-25
Power Cabinet
68P09255A57-2
Internal FRUs
Figure 1-10 shows the location of the Internal Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in the
following paragraphs.
Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity)
Rectifier
Alarm Module
Temperature
Control Module
Rectifier
Shelves
Batteries (Battery
Heaters located
under batteries)
GFCI Outlets
(Back)
NOTE
Punch Block is not
visible in this view.
DC Circuit
Breakers
AC Load
Center
FW00164
FRONT VIEW POWER CABINET
Batteries
The batteries provide a +27 Vdc backup to the RF Cabinet should AC
Power be lost. The Power Cabinet can accommodate a total of 24 12-V
batteries, configured in 12 strings of 2 batteries each. The time duration
of backup provided depends on system configuration.
Battery Heater
The battery heaters provide heating to the batteries in the Power Cabinet.
A separate heater is required for each string of batteries. The heater is a
pad the batteries sit on located top of each battery shelf. The number of
heaters is dependent on system configuration.
1-26
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Power Cabinet
68P09255A57-2
Battery Compartment Fan
The battery compartment fan provides air circulation for the two battery
compartments. It is located on the inside of the battery compartment
door.
Heat Exchanger
The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the rectifier compartment of the
Power Cabinet. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front door
of the Power Cabinet.
Rectifiers
The +27 Vdc rectifiers convert the AC power supplied to the Power
Cabinet to +27 Vdc to power the RF Cabinet and maintain the charge of
the batteries.
AC Load Center
The ACLC is the point of entry for AC Power to the Power Cabinet. It
incorporates AC power distribution and surge protection.
Punch Block
The Punch Block is the interface for the alarm signalling between the
Power Cabinet and the RF Cabinet.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
1-27
Power Cabinet
68P09255A57-2
Notes
1-28
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
2
Chapter 2
Power Up Procedures
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-1
Prepower-up
68P09255A57-2
Prepower-up
This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying
module placement, jumper, and dual in-line package (DIP) switch
settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS
application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are
presented.
Cellsite Types
Sites are configured as with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3-sectored with a
maximum of 4 carriers, and 6-sectored with a maximum of 2 carriers.
Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
CDF
The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data
information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The
number of modem frames, C-CCP shelves, BBX and MCC boards (per
cage), and linear power amplifier assignments are some of the equipage
data included in the CDF.
Site Equipage Verification
Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data
to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect
and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and
ancillary equipment frame.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive
surface or back into the anti-static bag it was shipped in.
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Step
Action
Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as
required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.
As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number
Checklist” in the site logbook.
2-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Prepower-up
68P09255A57-2
Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch
If the frame is a Starter BTS, the backplane switch settings behind the
fan module should be set to the ON position (see Figure 2-1).
The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the
BTS equipment.
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings
ON
OFF
STARTER FRAME
FAN MODULE
REMOVED
EXPANSION
FRAME 1
SETTING
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
ON
OFF
EBA
ETIB
RFDS
SC 4812ET
C-CCP SHELF
5 RU RACK SPACE
EXPANSION
FRAME 2
SETTING
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
ON
OFF
FW00167
Checking for shorts
The following information is used to check for any electrical short
circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS
power supply units before applying power for the first time. It contains
instructional information on the initial proper power up procedures for
the SC 4812ET power cabinet and RF cabinet. Also presented are tests
to be performed on the power cabinet. Please pay attention to all
cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury to
personnel.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-3
Prepower-up
68P09255A57-2
Required Tools
The following tools are used in the procedures.
 DC current clamp (600 Amp capability with jaw size to accommodate
2/0 cable).
 Hot Air Gun - (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)
 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems
Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly
connected:
 Receive RF cabling - up to 12 RX cables
 Transmit RF cabling - up to six TX cables
NOTE
For positive power applications (+27 V):
 The positive power cable is red.
 The negative power cable is black. (The black power cable is
at ground potential.)
Initial Inspection and Setup
CAUTION
Ensure all battery breakers for unused battery positions are open
(pulled out) during any part of the power up process, and remain
in the off position when leaving the site.
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup
Step
Action
Verify that ALL AC and DC breakers are turned OFF in both the Power and RF cabinets. Verify that
the DC power cables between the Power and RF cabinets are connected with the correct polarity
The RED cables connect to the uppermost three (3) terminals (marked +) in both cabinets. Confirm
that the split phase 240/120 AC supply is correctly connected to the AC load center input.
CAUTION
Failure to connect the proper AC feed will damage the surge
protection module inside the AC load center.
AC Power Check
The first task in the power up sequence is to apply AC power to the
Power cabinet. Once power is applied a series of AC Voltage
measurements is required.
Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements
Step
Action
Measure the AC voltages connected to the AC load center (access the terminals from the rear of the
cabinet after removing the AC load center rear panel). See Figure 2-2.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 Vac.
. . . continued on next page
2-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Prepower-up
68P09255A57-2
Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements
Step
Action
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 Vac.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 Vac.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 Vac.
Measure L1 - L2 - should be from 208 to 240 Vac.
CAUTION
If the AC voltages are in excess of 120 V (or exceed 200 V)
when measuring between terminals L1 or L2 to neutral or
ground, STOP and Do Not proceed until the cause of the higher
voltages are determined. The power cabinet WILL be damaged
if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on the
inputs.
Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring
L1
L2
= Ground
= Neutral
= Line 1
= Line 2
L1
L2
AC to Pilot Beacon
FW00305
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-5
AC Power Up Sequence
68P09255A57-2
AC Power Up Sequence
Applying AC Power
Once AC Voltage Measurements are complete, apply AC power to the
Power Cabinet. Table 2-4 provides the procedure for applying AC
power.
Table 2-4: Applying AC Power
Step
Action
When the input voltages are verified as correct, turn the Main AC breaker (located on the front of the
ACLC) ON. Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (see
Figure 2-7).
Turn Rectifier 1 and Rectifier 2 AC branch breakers (on the AC Load Center) ON. All the installed
rectifier modules (see Figure 2-7) will start up and should each have two green LEDs (DC and Power)
illuminated.
Turn the Meter Alarm Panel module, ON (see Figure 2-3), while observing the K2 contact in the
PDA assembly (see Figure 2-9). The contact should close. The Meter Alarm Panel voltage meter
should read approximately 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc.
Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) ON, (see Figure 2-4). Verify that the Meter Alarm
Control Panel does not have any alarm LEDs illuminated.
Check the rectifier current bargraph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None
should be illuminated at this point.
NOTE
If batteries are fitted, turn on the two battery heater AC breakers
on the AC Load Center.
Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm Panel
VOLT
AMPS
VOLT
AMP
TEST POINTS
TEST POINTS
PWR
OFF ON
FW00245
FRONT VIEW
Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation Panel
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PANEL
1/2 A 250V
OFF ON
ON
SENSOR SENSE
COM 1 2 + -
25 c
V ADJ
FRONT VIEW
2-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
FW00246
Aug 2002
AC Power Up Sequence
68P09255A57-2
Power Cabinet Power Tests
Table 2-5 lists the step-by-step instructions for Power Up Tests.
Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests
Step
Action
Probe the output voltage test point on the Meter Alarm Panel while pressing the 25° C set button on
the TCP (see Figure 2-4). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust Master Voltage on Meter
Alarm Panel if necessary. Release the TCP 25° C set button.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V
compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is
warmer than 25C, the voltage will be lower.
Ensure the RF cabinet 400A main DC breaker is OFF.
Close the three (3) Main DC breakers on the Power Cabinet ONLY. Close by holding in the reset
button on the front of the PDA, and engaging one breaker at a time.
Measure the voltage between the + and - terminals at the rear of the Power Cabinet and the RF
Cabinet, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage should be the same as the measurement in
step 2.
Place the probes across the black and red battery buss bars in each battery compartment. Place the
probe at the bottom of the buss bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should measure
the same as the previous step.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-7
DC Power Pre-test
68P09255A57-2
DC Power Pre-test
DC Power Checks
Before applying any power to the BTS cabinet, verify there are no shorts
in the RF or power DC distribution system (see Figure 2-5).
Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Physically verify that all AC rectifiers supplying power to the RF cabinets are OFF or disabled (see
Figure 2-5). There should be no 27 Vdc on DC feed terminals.
On each RF cabinet:
 Unseat all circuit boards/ modules in the distribution shelf, transceiver shelf, and Single Carrier
Linear Power Amplifier (SCLPA) shelves, but leave them in their associated slots.
 Unseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but
leave them in their associated slots.
 Set C-CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled
C-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).
 Set LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (8 breakers,
labeled 1A-1B through 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel).
Verify that the resistance from the power (+) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on the
cabinet measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-5).
 If reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the
breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or
missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).
Set the 400 Amp Main Breaker and the C-CCP breakers (C-CCP 1, 2, 3) to the ON position by
pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each breaker.
* IMPORTANT
If, after inserting any board/module, the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω, a short probably exists in that
board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the
problem before proceeding.
Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules into their associated slots one at a time. Repeat step3
after inserting each module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge, finally
indicating approximately 500 Ω.
! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C-CCP shelf.
Repeat step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
. . . continued on next page
2-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
DC Power Pre-test
68P09255A57-2
Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Set the 8 LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each
breaker.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.
Repeat step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
Seat the Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options breakers one at a time. Repeat step 3.
RF Cabinet Power Up
Table 2-7 covers the procedures for properly powering up the RF
Cabinet.
Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up
Step
Action
Ensure the 400 Amp Main DC breaker and all other breakers in the RF Cabinet are OFF.
Proceed to the DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) sequence (see Table 2-6) (for initial power-up as
required).
Ensure the power cabinet is turned on (see Table 2-5). Verify that 27 volts is applied to the terminals
on the back of the RF cabinet.
Engage the main DC circuit breaker on the RF cabinet (see Figure 2-5).
On each RF cabinet:
 Set C-CCP shelf breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (labeled
C-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).
 Set LPA breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (8 breakers, labeled 1A-1B
through 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel).
 Set the two heat exchanger breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time.
 Set the ETIB breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.
 Set the OPTION breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.
Measure the voltage drop between the Power Cabinet meter test point and the 27 V buss bar inside the
RF Cabinet PDA while the RF Cabinet is transmitting.
NOTE
For a 3-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.2 V.
For a 12-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.3 V.
Aug 2002
Using a DC current probe, measure the current in each of the six (6) DC cables that are connected
between the RF and Power Cabinet. The DC current measured should be approximately the same. If
there is a wide variation between one cable and the others (>20 A), check the tightness of the
connections (torque settings) at each end of the cable.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-9
DC Power Pre-test
68P09255A57-2
Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27Vdc Terminal Locations
400
5 RU RACK
SPACE
MAIN BREAKER
1A
30
1B
1C
30
1D
2A
30
2B
2C
30
2D
3A
30
3B
3C
30
3D
4A
30
4B
4C
30
4D
PS1
50
PS2
50
PS3
50
LPA
BLOWERS
25
SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet
(Front View)
RF CABINET
(Rear View)
HEAT EXCHANGER
CAUTION
SHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERS
25 ONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGER
MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR
PUSH BUTTON
TO RESET
LPA BLOWERS
ETIB
10
OPTION
15
27V Ret
FW00307
2-10
27V
I/O Plate + and - DC Feed
Terminals (Back Panel of RF
Cabinet)
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Battery Test
68P09255A57-2
Battery Test
Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Table 2-8 lists the step-by-step instructions for testing the batteries.
Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Step
Action
Close the battery compartment breakers for connected batteries ONLY. This process should be
completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings with excess charge current
NOTE
If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually
due to the surge current. If this condition is observed, turn off the Meter Alarm Panel power switch,
and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers, the Meter Alarm Panel power switch
should then be turned ON.
Using the DC current probe, measure the current in each of the battery string connections to the buss
bars in each battery cabinet. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly reduce in a
few minutes if the batteries have a typical new battery charge level.
The current in each string should be approximately equal (+ 5 A).
The bargraph meters on the rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of the total battery
charge current. Each rectifier module has eight LEDs to represent the output current. Each illuminated
LED indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8 or 8.75 A) of the rectifier’s maximum (70 A) current is
flowing.
EXAMPLE:
Question: A system fitted with three rectifier modules each have three bargraph LEDs illuminated.
What is the total output current into the batteries?
Answer: Each bargraph is approximately indicating 12.5% of 70 A, therefore, 3 X 8.75A equals
26.25A. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 X 26.25 A) 78.75 A.
This charge current calculation only applies at this part of the start up procedure when the RF Cabinet
is not powered on, and the power cabinet heat exchanger is turned off.
Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further
action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current
in each string should reduce to less than 5 A.
Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the Power Up
Test.
NOTE
If discharged batteries are installed, all bargraphs may be illuminated on the rectifiers during the
charge test. This indicates that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries.
It is recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above
step before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-11
Battery Test
68P09255A57-2
Discharge Test
Perform the test procedure in Table 2-9 only when the battery current is
less than 5 A per string. Refer to Table 2-8 for the procedures to check
current levels.
Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test
Step
Action
Turn the battery test switch on the Meter Alarm Panel, ON (see Figure 2-3). The rectifier output
voltage and current should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms
for the Meter Alarm Panel may occur.
Measure the individual battery string current using the DC current probe. The battery discharge
current in each string should be approximately the same (within± 5 A).
Turn Battery Test Switch OFF.
CAUTION
2-12
Failure to turn OFF the Battery Test Switch before leaving the
site, will result in low battery capacity and reduce battery life.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Heat Exchanger Power Up
68P09255A57-2
Heat Exchanger Power Up
Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up
Step
Action
Turn the Power Cabinet Heat Exchanger breakers ON (seeFigure 2-6 for breaker location).
The Heat Exchanger will now go into a five (5) minute test sequence. Ensure that the internal and
external fans are operating. Place a hand on the internal and external Heat Exchanger grills to feel for
air draft.
Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly
Heat Exchanger
Assembly
Bottom (Ambient) Blower
Mounting
Bracket
Fan Module
Top (Internal) Blower
Blower
Power
Cord
Core
Mounting
Bracket
Fan Module
T-30 Screw
Blower
Power
Cord
T-30 Screw
POWER CABINET
Front View
OUT=OFF
IN=ON
Blower Assembly
Circuit Breaker
Side View
Aug 2002
FW00181
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-13
Heat Exchanger Power Up
68P09255A57-2
Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies
DC Circuit
Breaker
25
160
160
160
25
ON
OFF
BREAKER SYSTEM BREAKER
SHOULD BE RESET
IF ILLUMINATED OR
AFTER RESET OF
BREAKER SYSTEM
3 MAIN BREAKERS
BREAKER
SYSTEM RESET
BUTTON
TO RESET MAIN BREAKERS, PRESS
AND HOLD IN GREEN BUTTON WHILE
PRESSING 160 AMP BREAKER BUTTON
UNTIL LATCHED RELEASE GREEN BUTTON
AFTER ALL 3 BREAKERS HAVE BEEN RESET
POWER CABINET
Front View
ATTENTION
RECTIFIER
SHELF #1
Circuit Breaker Legend:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Shelf #1 . . . .
Rectifier Shelf #2 . . . .
Battery Heater #1 . . . .
Battery Heater #2 . . . .
GFCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECTIFIER
SHELF #2
150 Amp
70 Amp
70 Amp
15 Amp
15 Amp
15 Amp
15 Amp
BATTERY
HEATER #1
MAIN
BATTERY
HEATER #2
CAUTION
LIVE TERMINALS
GFCI
SPARE
LED Status
AC Circuit
Breaker
FW00144
2-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Heat Exchanger Power Up
68P09255A57-2
Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers
7/16 NUT
AC Circuit Breaker
150 Amp Breaker
POWER CABINET
Front View
5/16 NUT
SCREW
WIRE
15 Amp Breaker
LEFT TAB
RIGHT TAB
SCREW
5/16 NUT
WIRE
WIRE
LEFT TABS
30 Thru 140 Amp Breaker
RIGHT
TABS
FW00145
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
2-15
Heat Exchanger Power Up
68P09255A57-2
Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers
DC Circuit Breaker
9/32 Nut
15 AMP
POWER CABINET
Front View
3x150 AMP
DC Power
Panel Door
Locks
FW00146
2-16
Flat Washer
Lock Washer
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
17 mm Nut
Aug 2002
3
Chapter 3
Optimization/ATP
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-1
Basic Optimization
68P09255A57-2
Basic Optimization
Introduction
This chapter provides procedures for downloading system operating
software, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM reference
verification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.
NOTE
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the ”CAVEATS”
section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any
applicable information.
Optimization Process
After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations
(power up) have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrate
and optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process can be
accomplished as follows:
 Download MGLI with code and data and then enable MGLI.
NOTE
The GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s
 Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of
the following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,
GLI3, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device is
installed and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in
the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF file
will have to be corrected before the device can be accessed by CDMA
LMF.
 Download code and data to all devices of the following types:
- CSM
- BBX (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)
- GLI3 (other than GLI3-1)
- MCC (may be MCC-8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)
 Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed).
 Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO or LFR signals.
 Enable the following devices (in the order listed):
- Secondary CSM (slot 2)
- Primary CSM (slot 1)
- All MCCs
 Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.
 Select the test equipment.
 Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been
calibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for the
optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be
entered manually.
 Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full
optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX
calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests
for all selected devices.
3-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Basic Optimization
68P09255A57-2
 If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed
paths.
 If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the
failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.
 If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes
for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem that
caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TX
and RX tests have passed for all paths.
Cell-site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type
has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
NOTE
For more information on the different in site types, please refer
to the applicable BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation and
Functional Hardware Description manuals.
Cell-site Data File
The Cell-Site Data File (CDF) contains information that defines the
BTS and data used to download files to the devices. A CDF file must be
placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log
into that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a
floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF
computer has the cabability.
The CDF includes the following information:
 Download instructions and protocol
 Site specific equipage information
 C-CCP shelf allocation plan
- BBX equipage (based on cell-site type) including redundancy
- CSM equipage including redundancy
- MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC-1X) channel element allocation
plan. This plan indicates how the C-CCP shelf is configured, and
how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel
elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to
12) MCCs in the shelf.
 CSM equipage including redundancy
 Effective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a
transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and
government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the
antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and
antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required
power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX output
level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can
also be determined.
NOTE
Aug 2002
Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for additional
information on the layout of the LMF directory structure
(including CDF file locations and formats).
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-3
Basic Optimization
68P09255A57-2
BTS System Software Download
BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS
processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating
code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.
Circuit Backhaul BTS
The information below is for Circuit-Backhaul BTS. GLI-3’s
configured for Circuit-backhaul use bts.cdf files.
NOTE
Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct
bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files for the BTS must be obtained
from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF. Failure to
use the correct CDF files can cause wrong results.
CAUTION
Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic
carrying) site can shut down the site.
Packet-Backhaul BTS
GLI-3’s are configured for Packet-backhaul BTS’s the file that is needed
to login to the BTS is the NECF file (bts-xxx.xml) located on the
OMC/R.
The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted
diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has
ftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, or the LMF
Help screen, for more information.
Site Equipage Verification
If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, and
review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data
in the CDF to the actual site hardware.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installation
of any card/module. After removal, the card/module should be
placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag in
which it was shipped.
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans
NOTE
At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place
it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span surge
protectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Each frame is equipped with one 50-pair punch block for spans,
customer alarms, remote GPS, and power cabinet alarms. See Figure 3-2
and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin call-out
information. To disable the span, pull the surge protectors for the
respective span.
Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must
disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the
CDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending
control information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests.
3-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Configure Channel Service Unit
68P09255A57-2
Configure Channel Service Unit
The M-PATH 537 Channel Service Unit (CSU) provides in-band
SNMP-managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1 lines.
M-PATH units plug into the Kentrox 2-slot frame (see Figure 3-1).
Remote M-PATH management is available via SNMP over an in-band
data link on the T1 line (using a facility data link or 8-64 kbps of a DS0
channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be an
SNMP manager or another M-PATH CSU.
Each 19 inch rack can support two CSU M-PATH 537 modules. Each
M-PATH 537 module supports one and only one span connection.
Programming of the M-PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9-pin
connector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a Microsoft
Windows programming disk is supplied with each unit.
Setting the Control Port
Whichever control port is chosen, it must first be set up so the control
port switches match the communication parameters being used by the
control device. If using the rear-panel DTE control port, set the
shelf-address switch SA5 to “up” (leave the switch down for the
rear-panel DCE control port).
For more information, refer to the vendor user manual (part number
1174139) and installation manual (part number 1174462) provided with
each CSU.
Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:
Part Number
Description of Cable
01-95006-022 (six feet)
DB-9S to DB-9P
01-95010-022 (ten feet)
The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:
 A PC using the AT 9-pin interface
 A modem using the 9-pin connector
 Other shelves in a daisy chain
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-5
Configure Channel Service Unit
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU
To/From
Network
To/From
Network
To/From
GLI
DTE
To/From
GLI
DATA PORT
DCE
SLOT 2
T1
DDS
SLOT 1
T1
T1 TERMINAL
NETWORK
DDS
T1 TERMINAL
NETWORK
CONTROL
PORT
DATA PORT
GROUP
ADDRESS
SHELF
ADDRESS
Back View
SLOT 1
Front View
DCE Connector
(Craft Port)
CAUTION
3-6
SLOT 2
REF. FW00212
SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C is
swapped
-On the SC4812ET’s, the span cable internal to the base station
that connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU has
Span B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled.
-CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock as per
Motorola documentation and punchdown chart. When conecting
the span input to the CSU re-label “Span B” cable to”Span C”
cable to “Span B”. Connect to CSU as per documentation
Note: The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to the
CSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected on
revision “D” to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. D
will be approximately January 30, 2001.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
68P09255A57-2
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
See Figure 3-2 and refer toTable 3-1for the physical location and pin
call-out information for the 50-pin punch block.
Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block
TO MODEM
CONNECTOR TO ALARMS
CONNECTOR
STRAIN RELIEVE INCOMING
CABLE TO BRACKET WITH
TIE WRAPS
TO LAN
CONNECTOR
RF Cabinet I/O Area
TO RGD/RGPS
CONNECTOR
LEGEND
1T = PAIR 1 - TIP
1R = PAIR 1 -RING
”
”
”
”
”
”
2R
2T
1R
1T
49T
1T 1R 2T 2R
49R
50T
50R
FW00162
TOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCK
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-7
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
68P09255A57-2
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
Table 3-1 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pin
punch block.
Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
Signal Name
Punch Pin
Function
Power Cabinet
ALARM
HSO/LFR
Extension
LFR Antenna
Pilot Beacon
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
Power Cab Control - NC
1T
Blue
Power Cab Control - NO
1R
Blk/Blue
Power Cab Control-Com
2T
Yellow
Reserved
2R
N/C
Rectifier Fail
3T
Blk/Yellow
AC Fail
3R
Green
Power Cab Exchanger Fail
4T
Blk/Grn
Power Cab Door Alarm
4R
White
Power Cab Major Alarm
5T
Blk/White
Battery Over Temp
5R
Red
Power Cab Minor Alarm
6T
Blk/Red
Reticifier Over Temp
6R
Brown
Power Cab Alarm Rtn
7T
Blk/Brn
LFR_HSO_GND
7R
EXT_1PPS_POS
8T
EXT_1PPS_NEG
8R
CAL_+
9T
CAB_-
9R
LORAN_+
10T
LORAN_-
10R
Pilot Beacon Alarm - Minor
11T
Pilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn
11R
Pilot Beacon Alarm - Major
12T
Pilot Beacon Control-NO
12R
Pilot Beacon Control - COM
13T
Pilot Beacon Control - NC
13R
. . . continued on next page
3-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
ALARM
ALARM
Signal Name
Punch Pin
Function
Customer Outputs
Customer Inputs
Customer Outputs 1 - NO
14T
Customer Outputs 1 - COM
14R
Customer Outputs 1 - NO
14T
Customer Outputs 1 - COM
14R
Customer Outputs 1 - NC
15T
Customer Outputs 2 - NO
15R
Customer Outputs 2 - COM
16T
Customer Outputs 2 - NC
16R
Customer Outputs 3 - NO
17T
Customer Outputs 3 - COM
17R
Customer Outputs 3 - NC
18T
Customer Outputs 4 - NO
18R
Customer Outputs 4-COM
19T
Customer Outputs 4 - NC
19R
Customer Inputs 1
20T
Cust_Rtn_A_1
20R
Customer Inputs 2
21T
Cust_Rtn_A_2
21R
Customer Inputs 3
22T
Cust_Rtn_A_3
22R
Customer Inputs 4
23T
Cust_Rtn_A_4
23R
Customer Inputs 5
24T
Cust_Rtn_A_5
24R
Customer Inputs 6
25T
Cust_Rtn_A_6
25R
Customer Inputs 7
26T
Cust_Rtn_A_7
26R
Customer Inputs 8
27T
Cust_Rtn_A_8
27R
Customer Inputs 9
28T
Cust_Rtn_A_9
28R
Customer Inputs 10
29T
Cust_Rtn_A_10
29R
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-9
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
Signal Name
Punch Pin
Function
Span 1
Span 2
Span 3
SPAN I/O
Span 4
Span 5
Span 6
RCV_TIP_A
30T
RCV_RING_A
30R
XMIT_TIP_A
31T
XMIT_RING_A
31R
RCV_TIP_B
32T
RCV_RING_B
32R
XMIT_TIP_B
33T
XMIT_RING_B
33R
RCV_TIP_C (Note)
34T
RCV_RING_C (Note)
34R
XMIT_TIP_C (Note)
35T
XMIT_RING_C(Note)
35R
RCV_TIP_D (Note)
36T
RCV_RING_D (Note)
36R
XMIT_TIP_D (Note)
37T
XMIT_RING_D(Note)
37R
RCV_TIP_E (Note)
38T
RCV_RING_E (Note)
38R
XMIT_TIP_E (Note)
39T
XMIT_RING_E(Note)
39R
RCV_TIP_F (Note)
40T
RCV_RING_F (Note)
40R
XMIT_TIP_F (Note)
41T
XMIT_RING_F(Note)
41R
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
NOTE
Span 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes
. . . continued on next page
3-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
Signal Name
Punch Pin
Function
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
GPS_Power_A
42T
Yellow
GPS_Power_A_Return
42R
Yellow/Black
GPS_Power_B
43T
Blue
GPS_Power_B_Return
43R
Blue/Black
GPS_TXD+
44T
White
GPS_TXD-
44R
White/Black
GPS_RXD+
45T
Green
GPS_RXD-
45R
Green/Black
Signal Ground (TDR+)
46T
Red
Signal Ground (TDR-)
46R
Red/Black
GPS_1PPS+
47T
Brown
GPS_1PPS-
47R
Brown/Black
GPS_Power_A
42T
Yellow
GPS_Power_A_Return
42R
Yellow/Black
GPS_Power_B
43T
Blue
GPS_Power_B_Return
43R
Blue/Black
GPS_TXD+
44T
White
GPS_TXD-
44R
White/Black
GPS_RXD+
45T
Green
GPS_RXD-
45R
Green/Black
Signal Ground (TDR+)
46T
Red
Master Frame (TDR-)
46R
Red/Black
GPS_1PPS+
47T
Brown
GPS_1PPS-
47R
Brown/Black
Reserved
48T
MODEM
Reserved
48R
RGD/RGPS
Chassis Ground
49T
N/A
None
No Connection
49R
None
Reserved
50T
None
Reserved
50R
None
RGD/RGPS
RGD/RGPS
ALARM
Aug 2002
For frame
without RGD
Expansion
Punchblock
Single Frame
BTS;RGPS Head
Connection
OR
Multiple Frame
BTS; RGD
Connection at
RGPS Secondary
Frame
For frame with
RGD Expansion
Punchblock
OR
Multiple Frame
BTS; RGPS Head
Connection at
RGPS Primary
Frame
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-11
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
68P09255A57-2
T1/E1 Span Isolation
Table 3-2 describes the action required for span isolation.
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans
NOTE
At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place
it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span surge
protectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation
Step
Action
The OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS.
The Span Lines can be disabled by removing the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block. Using
Table 3-1 locate the span or spans which need to be disabled and remove the respective surge
protector.
NOTE
If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disabling the span
line.
3-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
LMF Operation
Preparing the LMF
Before optimization can be performed, the LMF application software
must be installed and configured on a computer platform meeting
Motorola-specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment
and Software in Chapter 1).
NOTE
For the LMF graphics to display properly, the computer platform
must be configured to display more than 256 colors. See the
operating system software instructions for verifying and
configuring the display settings.
Software and files for installing and updating the LMF are provided on
CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:
 LMF Program on CD ROM
 CDF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)
 CBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)
The following section provides information and instructions for
installing and updating the LMF software and files.
LMF Operating System Installation
Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to install the LMF operating system.
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation
Step
Action
Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.
- If the Setup screen is displayed, go to step 5.
- If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.
Click on the Start button.
Select Run.
In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.
NOTE
If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.
Follow the instructions displayed on the Setup screen.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-13
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
First Time Installations:
- Install U/WIN (First)
- Install Java Runtime Environment (Second)
- Install LMF Software (Third)
- Install BTS Binaries (Fourth)
- Install/Create BTS Folders (Fifth)
Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of the LMF
modifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win
over-writes these modifications.
NOTE
There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD-ROM. When prompted, choose
the load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform the Device
Images install after the WinLMF installation.
If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates.
CDMA LMF Home Directory
The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home directory
c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)
in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home
directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:
:\
Where:
 = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home
directory is located.
 = the directory path or name where the CDMA
LMF is installed
NOTE
The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home
directory c:\wlmf when the CDMA LMF is installed.
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer
Before logging on to a BTS with the LMF to execute optimization/ATP
procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained
from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This
requires creating versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS-formatted
floppy diskette and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the
LMF computer.
3-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
NOTE
When copying CDF files, comply with the following to prevent
BTS login problems with the LMF.
- The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf filenames
must correspond to the locally assigned numbers for each BTS
and its controlling CBSC.
- The generic cbsc-1.cdf file supplied with the LMF will work
with locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file will not
provide a valid optimization unless the generic file is edited to
replace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the
operational parameters used locally.
The procedure in Table 3-4 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF
files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For any further information,
refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part number
68P64114A21) or the LMF Help screen..
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF
Step
Action
Login to the CBSC workstation.
Insert a DOS-formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.
Type eject -q and press .
Type mount and press .
NOTE
 Look for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.
 If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number. Use
the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.
Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd 
(e.g., cd bts-248) and pressing .
Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.
With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS-formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files
on the diskette by entering the following command:
unix2dos  /floppy/no_name/
(e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts-248.cdf).
NOTE
 Other versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use the
Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text
editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMF
computer is, therefore, not recommended.
 Using cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the
command string following a space (e.g., cp bts-248.cdf cbsc-6.cdf /floppy/na_name)
Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts-# that must be supported by the LMF.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-15
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF
Step
Action
When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press .
10
Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.
11
If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer.
12
Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files into the LMF computer.
13
Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts-# folder in the  directory for each bts-#.cdf/cbsc-#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.
14
Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc-#.cdf and bts-#.cdf files from the
diskette to the corresponding \cdma\bts-# folders created in step 13.
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection
Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FRUs
requires establishing an MMI communication session between the LMF
and the FRU. Using features of the Windows operating system, the
connection properties for an MMI session can be saved on the LMF
computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal connection. This
eliminates the need for setting up connection parameters each time an
MMI session is required to support optimization.
Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on
the Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start the
connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminal
connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.
NOTE
There are differences between Windows NT and Windows 98 in
the menus and screens for creating a HyperTerminal connection.
In the following procedure, items applicable to:
- Windows NT will be identified with Win NT
- Windows 98 will be identified with Win 98
3-16
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs>Accessories
Perform one of the following:
 For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal or
 For Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click
on the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.
NOTE
 If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.
(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)
 If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.
When the Connection Description box opens:
- Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.
- Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and
- Click OK.
NOTE
For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a
physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS-232 port to be used
for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 - Win NT - or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 - Win
98), and click OK.
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS-232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
Click OK.
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File>Save
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File>Exit
Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.
10
Perform one of the following:
 If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12 or
 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-17
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection
Step
11
Action
Perform one of the following:
 For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.
 For Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12
Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it
(Win 98).
13
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
14
From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
15
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
Folder Structure Overview
The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home directory
c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders) in
it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home
directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:
:\
Where:
 = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home
directory is located
 = the directory path or name where the CDMA
LMF is installed.
Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure
:\ (drive letter)
 folder
cdma folder
BTS-nnn folders (A separate folder is
required for each BTS where bts-nnn is the
unique BTS number; for example, bts-163)
loads folder
version folder (A separate folder is
required for each different version; for
example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5)
code folder
data folder
3-18
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
LMF to BTS Connection
The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left
side of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access
door (see Figure 3-4).
Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection
Step
Action
To gain access to the connectors, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the Velcro tape
covering the BNC “T” connector and slide out the computer service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-4).
Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshielded
twisted-pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DC
transformer). If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B BNC connector. If there is
still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure.
NOTE
- Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet
connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC
transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.
* IMPORTANT
The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)
must not touch the chassis during optimization.
Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail
NOTE:
Open LAN CABLE ACCESS
door. Pull apart Velcro tape and
gain access to the LAN A or LAN
B LMF BNC connector.
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS
ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME
(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;
ETHERNET “B” COVERED
WITH VELCRO TAPE)
ETIB
10BASET/10BASE2
CONVERTER CONNECTS
DIRECTLY TO BNC T
LMF COMPUTER
TERMINAL WITH
MOUSE
PCMCIA ETHERNET
ADPATER & ETHERNET
UTP ADAPTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11
CONNECTORS)
EBA
RFDS
115 VAC POWER
CONNECTION
SC4812ET RF CABINET
FW00168
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-19
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
Pinging the Processors
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be be verified. Figure 3-5 represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.
Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN network
modules to get a response from the specified “target” module.
NOTE
WinLMF (unreleased version 2.16.1.0.15 for example) has an
option in the LOGIN menu to ping the GLI prior to login.
Follow the steps in Table 3-7 to ping each processor (on both LAN A
and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram
OUT
50Ω
IN
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
BTS
(MASTER)
1A
4A
2A
5A
3A
6A
20 Pair
Punchblock
(RGPS)
1B 2B
4B 5B
50 Pair
Punch
Block
3B
6B
(Alarms/
Spans)
RF Expansion Ports
1A
2A
3A
1B 2B
BTS
(EXPANSION)
RGD
Board
20 Pair
Punchblock
(RGPS)
RGD/RGPS
1A
Microwave
Power Input
+27V
4A
RF
GPS
2A
5A
3A
6A
1B 2B
4B 5B
50 Pair
Punch
Block
3B
6B
(Alarms/
Spans)
RF Expansion Ports
LAN
3B
CHASSIS
GROUND
1A
IN OUT
2A
3A
1B 2B
4A
5A
6A
4B 5B
Power Input
27V Ret
6B
Spans
Modem
Alams
Antenna’s
2 Sec
Remote
ASU
GND
Lugs
Power Input
+27V
RF
GPS
IN OUT
19 MHz
RGD/RGPS
Microwave
LAN
3B
Remote
ASU
RGD
Board
50Ω
4A
5A
6A
4B 5B
Power Input
27V Ret
6B
19 MHz
Spans
Modem
Alams
Antenna’s
2 Sec
GND
Lugs
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
CHASSIS
GROUND
FW00199
NOTE
3-20
IMPORTANT: The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be
installed on each frame/enclosure before performing this test. All
other processor board LAN connections are made via the
backplanes.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
LMF Operation
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-7: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
In the Open box, type ping and the GLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI3 in field BTS units.
Click on the OK button.
If the targeted module responds, text similar to the following is displayed:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
If there is no response the following is displayed:
Request timed out
If the GLI3 fails to respond, it should be reset and re-pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical
problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the
GLI3 itself.
Log into and out of the BTS
Table 3-8: Logging into the BTS
Step
Action
NOTE
The LMF Mouse/Tracball must be attached if Windows and/or the GUI applications will be used.
Connect the LMF to the BTS as shown in .
Power-up the LMF. Allow the Windows operating system to come up.
Click the CDMA LMF desktop icon.
Click CDMA icon. Ths list of available BTS cell sites appears.
Click on the desired BTS (for example, BTS-6). If the IP Address and Port number are correct, press
Login to BTS.
To keep the current IP Address for the next log in, click the Remember Modified Address box (a
check appears in the box).
To use the default IP Address setting, click on Use Defaults.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-21
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files
68P09255A57-2
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files
These procedures must be followed prior to an initial BTS optimization,
or anytime a new release of the BTS operating system software is to be
loaded from the LMF to the BTS.
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-9 to create a bts directory and
download files to that bts-specific directory. Perform this procedure only
if the CDF files have not been previously loaded.
Table 3-9: Downloading Site Specific BTS Files
Step
Action
NOTE
The types of files that can be downloaded include calibration files (.cal extension) and CDF files
(.cdf extension). Files may be compressed (indicated by a .Z extension).
Obtain the 3.5-in. diskette(s) containing the configuration data file and calibration data.
Enter the following UNIX command from the /usr/lmf directory, to create a BTS specific
directory (if it does not already exist).
mkdir bts-
Enter the following UNIX command to change to the newly created directory:
cd bts-
Insert the first 3.5 inch floppy diskette. Verify disk is loaded with the proper BTS files/ versions by
typing the following at the (lmf): prompt:
seedisk 
To load the BTS files from the disk into the appropriate directory, enter the following at the (lmf):
prompt:
fromdisk 
NOTE
 Copy bts-#.cdf and (if they exist) bts-#.cal files to the /usr/lmf/bts-# directory. (# equates
to the actual BTS site number).
 Unless sites use different device loads, create links to device files (as described in Table 3-10)
rather than placing individual copies into each bts directory.
If files are compressed, use the uncompress *.Z command to unpack files.
Download Files to the LMF - Master-bts-cdma Files
These procedures must be followed prior to an initial BTS optimization,
or anytime a new release of the BTS operating system software is to be
loaded from the LMF to the BTS.
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-10 to create a bts-master-cdma
directory, to download files, and to create softlinks to the device load
files into the appropriate bts-  subdirectory. (Always consult
latest software release notes as this is an interim procedure and is subject
to change).
3-22
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loads
Step
Action
NOTE
 If the current LMF code needs to be installed on the LMF PC, or if more information on file
management, creating bts directories, or viewing CDF files is needed, refer to the.LMF Users
Guide.
 The types of files that can be downloaded include code (.hex or .bin extension) and data (.dds
extension) files. Files may be compressed (indicated by a .Z extension).
Enter the following UNIX command, from the /usr/lmf directory, to create a device load master
directory (if it does not already exist).
mkdir bts-master-cdma
Enter the following UNIX command to change to the newly created directory:
cd bts-master-cdma
Obtain the 3.5-in. diskette(s) containing the current release of the BTS operating code and/or data
files.
NOTE
File naming conventions for all processor boards and applicable files for each are listed below.
Rename files using the mv UNIX command as required:
Device
File Name(s)
GLI
-gliboot.hex & gli.dds
BBX
-bbxboot.hex & bbx.dds
BDC
-bdcboot.hex & bdc.dds
MCC
-mccboot.hex.0501 & mcc.dds.0501
CSM
-csmboot.hex & csm.dds
TSU
tsuboot.hex
Insert the first 3.5 inch floppy diskette. Verify disk is loaded with the proper BTS files/versions by
typing the following at the (lmf): prompt:
seedisk 
To load the BTS files from the disk into the appropriate directory, enter the following at the (lmf):
prompt:
fromdisk 
If files are compressed, use the uncompress *.Z command to unpack files. Rename files to match
the naming conventions listed above if required.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each diskette that is a part of this load.
NOTE
All older versions of files (and links to files) in the bts-master- bts- subdirectories must
be removed before beginning this procedure.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-23
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loads
Step
Action
Create softlinks to the device load and data load files in the bts-master-cdma directory using the
following UNIX commands:
ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.hex
ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.hex.*
ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.dds
ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.dds.*
/usr/lmf/bts-/
/usr/lmf/bts-/
/usr/lmf/bts-/
/usr/lmf/bts-/
NOTE
You may need to specify specific file names in the command instead of using the * ”wildcard”
character in order to link multiple versions of files in the same subdirectory. Using *.* will link ALL
files in the directory.
3-24
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files
68P09255A57-2
Create BTS Specific CDF File
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-11 to create a BTS specific CDF
file, if one cannot be obtained from the OMCR/CBSC. (This is an
interim procedure and is subject to change).
Table 3-11: Create BTS Specific CDF File
Step
Action
! CAUTION
If you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice making
changes to it, prior to altering the “real” one.
NOTE
For more information on file management, creating bts directories, viewing/editing CDF files, refer
to LMF Users Guide.
Determine the CDF file, currently loaded on the LMF, is closest to the configuration at the site. Use a
generic CDF file that equips all devices, if possible. If this is an OMNI site, use an OMNI CDF file,
if SECTOR, use SECTOR CDF file.
List the contents of the bts- directory by entering the ls command at the (lmf) prompt
followed by a , to verify the CDF file for the site does not already exist.
Enter the following command to copy an existing CDF file on the LMF hard drive to the new BTS
directory.
cp /usr/lmf/bts-src_.cdf /usr/lmf/bts- dest_.cdf
NOTE
The following step is for LMF software releases version 5 and 6 only.
Globally change the BTS ID in the new CDF file using the following UNIX commands:
vi bts-new_.cdf
:1,$ s/Id1 = old_/Id1 = new_
:1,$ s/old__/new__
Include the underscore after the old and new bts # in the above command
:1,$ s/BTS\[old_/BTS\[new_
:wq
NOTE
You should now be able to log into the bts using the new CDF file. If you search for the old BTS #, it
should be gone. You will have to edit the CDF file (using the vi editor) as far as BBX, MCC, etc.
equipage is concerned.
Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version and Site Type
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-12 to update the existing BTS
specific CDF file NextLoad parameter, to reflect the current device load
version to be downloaded and verify the correct Site Type. (This is an
interim procedure and is subject to change).
CAUTION
Aug 2002
Device load version in the CDF file must match the current
version loaded at the OMCR/CBSC.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-25
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-12: Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version
Step
Action
! CAUTION
If you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice making
changes to it, prior to altering the “real” one.
* IMPORTANT
CDF files obtained from the OMCR/CBSC are modified by DELTA information being appended to
the end of the CDF file. The information in the DELTA fields take precedence over information in the
“core CDF file” For example: If NextLoad=‘‘1.2.3.4.5” for BBX 1 was specified in the CDF file, and
there was a DELTA entry specifying NextLoad=‘‘2.3.4.5.6” appended to the CDF file for the same
BBX, 2.3.4.5.6 would be the version used.
There are two ways resolve this. Edit both the DELTA and “core” areas of the file to reflect the same
version, or make sure the delta information is transferred to the main CDF file and delete all DELTA
CDF file entries.
Globally change the device load version number in the new CDF file using the following UNIX
commands:
vi bts-new_.cdf
:1,$ s/x.x.x.x.x/y.y.y.y.y
Where: x.x.x.x.x and y.y.y.y.y represent the old and new version number, respectively.
:wq
NOTE
You should now be able to download all devices at the BTS with the current device load version.
Verify the SiteType and SSType entries in the CDF file (under the BTS subheading) reflect the
following information. See example of applicable fields of CDF file below.
(CDMA only; 1900 MHz example shown):
BTS[#] = {
....,
SiteType=3,
SSType=16
...
},
Valid SiteTypes (SC9600=1, SC9600(Mixed)=2, SC2400=3, SC2400(Mixed)=4, SC600=5)
Valid SSTypes (CDMA800MHz=8, CDMA1900MHz=16,
CDMA900MHz=32)
Update Antenna Mapping Files
Earlier release versions may require the antenna.map file to be
updated. There are two antenna mapping files. These are
antenna.map and antenna.asu .
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to check the antenna mapping
file and update as needed.
3-26
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-13: Update Antenna Mapping Files
Step
Action
! CAUTION
If you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice making
changes to it, prior to altering the “real” one.
NOTE
For more information on file management, creating bts directories, viewing/editing CDF files, refer to
the LMF Users Guide.
View the antenna.map file (see below) and verify the Xcvrs listed in the CDF file (and that are
equipped in the BTS) are also listed in the antenna.map file (for both RX and TX tables). Make
sure the antenna.map file has enough RX and TX antennas listed to cover the number of sectors
indicated by CDF’s SiteConf parameter.
Example of Antenna Map File
--- Rx --1:M
2:D
3:M
4:D
5:M
6:D
--- Tx
1:0
2:0
3:0
4:0
5:0
6:0
-- Sec --
:RX1:
:RX2:
:RX3:
:RX4:
:RX5:
:RX6:
--- -- Sec -:TX1:
:TX2:
:TX3:
:TX4:
:TX5:
:TX6:
----- Xcvrs ----:1,4,5,8
:1,4,5,8
:2,4,6,8
:2,4,6,8
:3,4,7,8
:3,4,7,8
----- Xcvrs ----:1,4
:2,4
:3,4
:5,8
:6,8
:7,8
Verify all RX and TX antennas listed in the file antenna.map are also listed in the antenna.asu
file.
NOTE
The antenna.asu file is required only if the BTS is equipped with RFDS. Be sure that the information
in antenna files matches your actual configuration.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-27
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
Operating the LMF
Basic Operation
NOTE
The terms “CDMA LMF” and “WinLMF” are interchangeable
The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating
environments which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:
 Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
 Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:
Selecting and deselecting BTS devices
Enabling devices
Disabling devices
Resetting devices
Obtaining device status
Sorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A78.
Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one
handler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such that
the GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to
use the same handler.
When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds and
uses an in-progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI.
This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS login
session.
If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (this
happens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts the
GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the user
starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warning
message:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure that you want to start the application?
This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the
application. Selecting no terminates the application.
3-28
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
CLI Format Conventions
The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:
Verb
Device including device identifier parameters
Switch
Option parameters consisting of:
- Keywords
- Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value
- Parameter values
Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option
parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.
Following is an example of a CLI command.
measure bbx--  rssi channel=6 sector=5
Refer to the LMF CLI Commands (68P09251A59) for a complete
explanation of the CLI commands and their usage.
Logging into a BTS
NOTE
Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf file is used for
the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for the
BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files can
result in wrong results. Failure to use the correct CDF files to
log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTS’s at a
time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.
Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF is
properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-4). Follow the procedure in
Table 3-14 to log into a BTS.
Prerequisites
Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
 The LMF is correctly installed and prepared.
 A bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.
 The LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer
was connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating
system and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after
connecting it to the BTS (see Table 3-6 and Figure 3-4).
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-14 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-29
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-14: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Start the LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF’s not
running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Click on Login tab (if not displayed).
If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMA
icon.
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address
for MGLI-2.
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
Select the Multi-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop-down list (default
is MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration if required.
NOTE
When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is
connected to the starter frame.
Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.
10
Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)
NOTE
 If you attempt to log in to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
 There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
 If the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices can
be seen.
 If the MGLI is OOS-RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen.
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-15 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment
3-30
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-15: BTS CLI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI session
will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts-
host=
port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is
first login to this BTS).
port = IP port of the TS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to
this BTS)
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the
CLI operating environments.
NOTE
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a
BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and the CLI
environments at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either
environment will log out of it for both. When either a login or
logout is performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI
indication that the login or logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-16: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
Click on the BTS tab menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).
Click on Yes or press the Enter key to confirm logout. You are returned to the Login tab.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the
GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system should not log out of the BTS.
When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.
If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base Station
because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.
Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click OK in
the Logout Error popup which appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-31
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-17: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts- 
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
Command=logout bts-33
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
Establishing an MMI Communication Session
For those procedures that require MMI communications between the
LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to initiate the
communication session.
Table 3-18: Establishing MMI Communications
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires
MMI communication session.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows
desktop shortcut.
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from
the Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal>:\\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is the
download code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameter
of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have the
correct hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will
change to OOS_RAM (yellow).
When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automatically
also downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, the
MGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI will
not be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow).
When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through the
LMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green).
For non-GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM
(yellow).
The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:
 Master Group Line Interface (MGLI)
 Redundant GLI
 Clock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code
must be loaded)
 Multi Channel CDMA (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC-1X) cards
 Broadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cards
 RFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) or RFDS-1X RFDS
PROCessor (RPROC) card, if RFDS is installed
3-34
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
NOTE
IMPORTANT: The MGLI must be successfully downloaded
with RAM code and data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) status
before downloading any other device. The RAM code download
process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and then
enables the MGLI.
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Devices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is not
compatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before
downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the
procedure in Table 3-19 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the
correct ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.
Prerequisite
Identify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release being
used on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the
SC CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROM
containing the BSS software).
Table 3-19: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-14).
Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the BTS menu bar.
In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI3.
If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software release being used on the
BSS, log out of the BTS, disconnect the LMF computer, reconnect the span lines as described in
Table 5-6, and have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices.
When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being used, be sure the span lines
are disabled as outlined in Table 3-2 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data.
Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-20 to download the RAM code and
data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.
Prerequisites
 Prior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each
of the devices to be loaded (refer to Table 3-3).
 The LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer toTable 3-6), and is
logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-14).
Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices
Step
1a
Aug 2002
Action
Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code and data downloads by performing the
following steps:
- Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA from the
pull-down menus.
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-35
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices
Step
Action
1b
- Click on the BTS to be loaded.
-- The BTS will be highlighted.
1c
- Click the button next to the correct code version for the software release being used.
-- A black dot will appear in the button circle.
1d
- Click Save.
1e
- Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear.
Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus.
- A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status window.
- The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.
Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices and
repeating steps 3 and 4.
Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.
Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices
Downloads to non-GLI devices can be performed individually for each
device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAM
code and data are downloaded to non-GLI devices in separate steps.
NOTE
CSM devices are RAM code-loaded at the factory. RAM code is
downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software version needs to
be loaded.
NOTE
When downloading to multiple devices, the download may fail
for some of the devices (a time-out occurs). These devices can
be loaded individually after completing the multiple download.
Follow the steps in Table 3-21 to download RAM code and data to
non-GLI devices.
Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices
Step
Action
Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking on them.
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus.
- A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
NOTE
After a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has changed to the
OOS_RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
. . . continued on next page
3-36
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Operating the LMF
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices
Step
Action
To download data, select the target CSM, MCC and/or BBX device(s).
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select select Download > Data in the pull-down menus.
- A status report is displayed showing the results of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-37
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
System Tests
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can one of have three different clock sources. The Select CSM
Source function can be used to select the clock source for each of the
three inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM
needs to be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following
clock source options.
Local GPS
Remote GPS
HSO (only for source 2 & 3)
HSOX (only for source 2 & 3)
LFR (only for source 2 & 3)
10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)
NONE (only for source 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT, CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT
Table 3-22: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Select the applicable CSM(s).
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the CSM/MAWI menu item.
Click on the Select Clock Source menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the related
check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selection
action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R-GPS).
The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. The GPS receiver
(mounted on CSM 1) is used as the primary timing reference and
synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides redundancy (but
does not have a GPS receiver).
The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN-C LFR, HSO, or external 10
MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use as a secondary timing
reference. The HSOX is used for expansion frames. In all cases, the
CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.
3-38
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
NOTE
For RF-GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS receiver
“daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1 slot before
continuing.
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-23 to enable the CSMs installed in
the C-CCP shelves.
Table 3-23: Enable CSMs
Step
Action
Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM-2 first
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
NOTE
FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in the
Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.
CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).
* IMPORTANT
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operated
by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters satellite orbits;
therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”
that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPS
receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position fix
for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiver
needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, CSM-1 should be bright green (INS-ACT) and CSM-2 should be dark
green (INS-STY)
If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-7 and Table 3-26 to determine
the cause.
NOTE
After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green
(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “TX fine adjust”
parameter. The “TX fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 mS).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-24 to enable the MCCs installed in
the C-CCP shelves.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-39
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
NOTE
The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled, before
downloading and enabling the MCC.
Table 3-24: Enable MCCs
Step
Action
Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose MCCs.
From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Clock Synchronization Manager System Time
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in
slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy.
The CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the
remote GPS receiver (R-GPS). R-GPS uses a GPS receiver in the
antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have
a daughter card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF-GPS signal.
The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1
and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution Cards
(CCDs) buffer and distribute even-second reference and 19.6608 MHz
clocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to CSM 2. A
failure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to redundant
CSM 2 and CCD 2.
Each CSM2 board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides
19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referenced to the
selected synchronization source (see Table 3-26):
 GPS: local/RF-GPS or remote/R-GPS
 LORAN-C Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability Oscillator
(HSO)
 External reference oscillator sources
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1
board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-26). The source
selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.
Synchronization between the primary and redundant CSM CCD pairs, as
well as the LFR or HSO back-up to GPS synchronization, increases
reliability.
LFR/HSO
The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
3-40
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN-C system. Since the
HSO is a free-standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion frames. The associated expansion frames require an
HSO-expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has an LFR2 or an
HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame and interfaces
with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and LFR2 use the
same source code in source selection (see Table 3-26). HSO, HSO2, and
HSOX use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-26).
NOTE
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60
minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM board
warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillator
frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-up
allows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequency
before any measurements are made.
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM
boards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of this
procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall
optimization has been completed.
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-25 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
Action
1a
For local GPS (RF-GPS): Verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM slot 1
and that CSM-1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.
1b
For Remote GPS (RGPS):Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED or later.
Aug 2002
Remove CSM-2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
board) to the MMI port on CSM-1 (see Figure 3-7).
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-41
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
Action
Reinstall CSM-2.
Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5)
NOTE
The LMF program must be running when a Hyperterminal session is started.
When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.
CAUTION
Connect GPS antenna to the (GPS) RF connector ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any other RF connector.
Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal Connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM board shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
LED (NOTE 1)
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9-PIN TO 9-PIN
RS-232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9-TO-DB25
ADAPTER
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN-SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS-RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
3-42
RS-232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-26 to connect to CSM-1 installed in
the C-CCP shelf, verifying that it is functioning normally.
Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
- Observe the following typical response:
CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the
GPS receivers.
sources
- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:
N Source Name Type
TO Good Status
Last Phase Target Phase Valid
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 LocalGPS
Primary 4
YES
Good
Yes
1 LFR CHA
Secondary 4
YES
Good
-2013177
-2013177
Yes
2 Not Used
Current reference source number: 0
- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
No
N/A
timed-out*
Timed-out* No
*NOTE “Timed-out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not-Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back-up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources  at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid
source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Yes
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-43
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
- If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
- If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
- Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage
3-44
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
- GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
- At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring the site up.
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
- Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
Aug 2002
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon -350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991-1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98-P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
- At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
- GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
- Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-45
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
- If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
- If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
- The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
- GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
- There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
- Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed-up proceed to step 9)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm-up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
-11,
-11,
-11,
-11,
-11,
-11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
10
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
- Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than -60 (equates to 3 µs limit).
- Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3 µs limit).
- TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
11
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
3-46
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
LORAN-C Initialization/Verification
Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus  to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus 
LFR Station
St ti
St
Status:
Clock coherence: 512
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N
5930X 52/64 dn -1 S/N
5990
47/55 dB -6 S/N
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N
7980X 48/54 dB -4 S/N
7980Y 46/58 dB -8 S/N
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N
9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N
9610X 46/57 dB -5 S/N
9610Y 48/54 dB -5 S/N
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N
9940M 50/53 dB -1 S/N
9940W 49/56 dB -4
4 S/N
9940Y 46/50 dB-10 S/N
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N
9960X 51/63 dB -1 S/N
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N
Note
> This must be greater
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag: . PLL Station .
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag
Flag:
Flag:S
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
> This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-47
System Tests
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
- Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
- Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
- Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources  to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
- Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
-3
Yes
LFR ch A
Secondary 4
Yes
Good
-2013177
-2013177
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 1
LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
- The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
- The antenna pre-amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
- A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
- The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
3-48
Close the hyperterminal window.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Calibration and Test Equipment
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS
The following test equipment is required to perform calibration and ATP
tests:
 LMF
 Communications system analyzer model supported by the LMF
 Power meter model supported by the LMF (required when using the
HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)
 Non-radiating transmit line termination load
 Directional coupler and in-line attenuator
 RF cables and adapters
Refer to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29 for an overview of connections for
test equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the
following figures:
 Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9 show cable calibration test setup.
 Figure 3-10, Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-13 show the test set
connections for TX calibration.
 Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show test set connections for IS-95 A/B
optimization/ATP tests
 Figure 3-15 through Figure 3-18 shows test set connections for
IS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.
 Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with
a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).
Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE-488/GPIB
bus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must have
a GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard address
settings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment items
are as follows:
 Signal generator address: 1
 Power meter address: 13
 Communications system analyzer: 18
Using the procedures included in the Setting GPIB Addresses section of
Appendix D-1, verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of each
piece of test equipment used to match the above
Supported Test Sets
CAUTION
Aug 2002
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connections
must be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator as
shown in the test setup illustrations.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-49
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
IS-95 A/B Testing
Optimization and ATP testing for IS-95A/B sites or carriers may be
performed using one of the following test equipment:
 CyberTest
 Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator and
HP-437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
 Agilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator
 Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935)
 Hewlett-Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface for 1.9 GHz PCS
Interface) and HP-437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
 Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) - optional
 Rubidium Standard Timebase - optional
CDMA2000 1X Operation
Optimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers may
be performed using the following test equipment:
 Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator
 Agilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator
 Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for
1X FER
NOTE
E4432B signal generator for 1X FER needs to have the options
UN8,1E5, and 201.
Test Equipment Preparation
See Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set and
power meter to perform calibration and ATP .
3-50
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Test Equipment Connection Charts
To use the following charts to identify necessary test equipment
connections, locate the communications system analyzer being used in
the COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read down
the column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of the
test cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end
connection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriate
equipment and/or BTS connector.
IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Connections
Table 3-28 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently
available test equipment supporting IS-95A/B only which meets
Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF.
Table 3-28: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER
SIGNAL
Cyber-Test
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
EVEN
SEC REF
TIME
BASE IN
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
Aug 2002
Advantest
R3465
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
HP 8921A
HP 8921
W/PCS
EVEN SEC
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
SYNC
MONITOR
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP-IB
HP-IB
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50W
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF
GEN OUT
RF OUT
50W
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
Power
Meter
HP-IB
GPIB
Interface
Attenuator
Directional
Coupler
GPIB
LMF
SERIAL
PORT
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
BTS
20 DB
BTS
ATTEN. PORT
TX1-6
RX1-6
3-51
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B-capable Test Equipment
Connections
Table 3-29 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently
available test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X and
IS-95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by the
LMF.
Table 3-29: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
ANALYZER
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
10 MHZ
Agilent
8935
(Option
200 or
R2K)
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
Advantest
R3267
Agilent
E4406A
Agilent
E4432
Signal
Gen.
EXT TRIG
TRIGGER
IN
PATTERN
TRIG IN
EXT REF
IN
EXT REF
IN
HP-IB
GP-IB
10 MHZ
REF OUT
10 MHZ
OUT
SIGNAL SOURCE
CONTROLLED
SERIAL I/O
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
GPIB
GPIB
10 MHZ OUT
(SWITCHED)
10 MHZ
IN
SERIAL
I/O
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
DUPLEX
OUT *
INPUT
50 W
Advantest
R3562
Signal
Generator
EXT TRIG
IN
SYNC
MONITOR
MOD TIME
BASE IN
FREQ
MONITOR
GP-IB
Power
Meter
HP-IB
GPIB
Interface
GPIB
LMF
Attenuator
Directional
Coupler
BTS
SERIAL
PORT
SYNTHE
REF IN
SERIAL
I/O
RF INPUT
50 W
20 DB
BTS
ATTEN. PORT
RF OUTPUT
50 W
RF OUT
50 W
TX1-6
RX1-6
* WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS-95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX TESTING.
3-52
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Equipment Warm-up
NOTE
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to
performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS
stability and contributes to optimization accuracy.
- Time spent running initial or normal power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX
OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed.
- At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna
(sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS. Failure to do
so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment
damage.
Automatic Cable Calibration Set-up
Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9 show the cable calibration setup for the test
sets supported by the LMF. The left side of the diagram depicts the
location of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item,
and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 3-33
provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.
Manual Cable Calibration
If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in
Appendix Figure 3-8.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-53
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
ANT IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The 30 dB directional coupler is not used
with the Cybertest test set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest test set.
B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest test
set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A
(formerly HP 8935)
ÁÁ
Á
Á
ÁÁ
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Advantest Model R3465
RF OUT 50Ω
C. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP
50 Ω
ΤERM.
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
INPUT 50Ω
20 DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A
SHORT
CABLE
DUPLEX
OUT
ANT
IN
TX CABLE FOR
TX TEST CABLE
CALIBRATION
TEST
SET
RX CABLE FOR
DRDC RX TEST
CABLE CALIBRATION
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
3-54
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-9: Cable Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
SHORT
CABLE
RF OUTPUT
50 Ω
TEST
SET
B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RF INPUT
50 Ω
RX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
NOTE:
TEST
SET
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER
(FIGURE F-5).
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP
50 Ω
ΤERM.
INPUT 50 Ω
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
20 DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RF OUT
50 Ω
TX CABLE FOR
TX TEST CABLE
CALIBRATION
NOTE:
TEST
SET
RX CABLE FOR
DRDC RX TEST
CABLE CALIBRATION
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
Set-up for TX Calibration
Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-55
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and
Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
FRONT PANEL
POWER
SENSOR
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC ANTENNA
CONNECTOR.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
RF IN/OUT
GPIB
RF
IN/OUT
TX TEST
CABLE
NOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
HP-IB
TO GPIB
BOX
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
RF IN/OUT
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN
PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/
AUDIT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
3-56
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power Meter
TEST SETS
NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST
R3465 CANNOT BE USED FOR TX
CALIBRATION. A POWER METER MUST BE
USED.
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
POWER
SENSOR
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC ANTENNA
CONNECTOR.
POWER METER
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
TX TEST
CABLE
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-57
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567
(IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Agilent E4406A
POWER
SENSOR
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC ANTENNA
CONNECTOR.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
RF INPUT 50 Ω
OR INPUT 50 Ω
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
GPIB
TX TEST
CABLE
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN
PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/
AUDIT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
RF INPUT
50 Ω
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
Advantest R3267
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
INPUT 50 Ω
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
3-58
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Set-up for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown - CyberTest and Advantest R3465
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
RF GEN OUT
OR RF OUT 50Ω
RX TEST
CABLE
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE
TX AND RX TEST CABLES
CONNECT TO THE DRDC
ANTENNA CONNECTOR.
(SEE FIGURE 3-15.)
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
RF IN/OUT
OR
INPUT 50 Ω
GPIB
RF GEN
OUT
NOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is not
used with the Cybertest test set. The TX
cable is connected directly to the Cybertest
test set.
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
Advantest Model R3465
TX TEST
CABLE
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RF OUT 50Ω
TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTOR
ON REAR OF TEST SET
(FOR DETAILS, SEE FIGURE F-3)
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
INPUT 50Ω
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
BNC
“T”
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
Aug 2002
TX TEST
CABLE
RF
IN/OUT
SYNC MONITOR EVEN
SEC TICK PULSE
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-59
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-14: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921A
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
RX TEST
CABLE
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
RF OUT ONLY
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE
TX AND RX TEST CABLES
CONNECT TO THE DRDC
ANTENNA CONNECTOR.
(SEE FIGURE 3-15.)
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RF IN/OUT
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
TX TEST
CABLE
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
* FOR 1900 MHZ
ONLY
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
RF
IN/OUT
GPIB
RF OUT
ONLY
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
RF
IN/OUT
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
PCS INTERFACE
INPUT/OUTPUT
PORTS
DUPLEX
OUT
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
TO
MPC
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
NOTE:
BTS
FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THE
HP 8921A AS FOLLOWS:
GPIB ADRS
RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUT
SYNC
MONITOR
TX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUT
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
3-60
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-15: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Agilent Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUTPUT 50 Ω
OR DUPLEX OUT
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
10 MHZ
IN
PATTERN
TRIG IN
RX TEST
CABLE
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
HP-IB
TO GPIB
BOX
RF IN/OUT
OR
RF INPUT
50 Ω
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
DUPLEX OUT
SIGNAL GENERATOR
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
GPIB
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
EXT
REF
IN
10 MHZ
OUT
TRIGGER IN
OR
EVEN SEC
SYNCH IN
GPIB
TX TEST
CABLE
RF IN/OUT
50 Ω
TERM
10 MHZ
REF OUT
NOTE:
THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1X
TX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCE
TESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TO
PERFORM 1X RX TESTING.
BNC
“T”
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
DUPLEXED
TX/RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
DRDC
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
ANT
CPLD
BTS
CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS *
RF INPUT
50 Ω
TO
MPC
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
TO EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
BNC
“T”
LAN
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
NOTE:
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER
(FIGURE F-5).
Aug 2002
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-61
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-16: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUT
50 Ω
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
SIGNAL GENERATOR
MOD TIME
BASE IN
RX TEST
CABLE
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
GPIB
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
SYNTHE
REF
IN
EXT
TRIG IN
INPUT
50 Ω
10 MHZ
OUT
EXT TRIG
GPIB
INPUT 50 Ω
TX TEST
CABLE
BNC
“T”
RF OUT
50 Ω
50 Ω
TERM
BNC
“T”
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
DUPLEXED
TX/RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
NOTE:
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
GPIB
CABLE
DRDC
ANT
CPLD
BTS
CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TO
MPC
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
3-62
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-17: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs Agilent Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
RF OUTPUT 50 Ω
OR DUPLEX OUT
RX TEST
CABLE
Agilent 8935 Model E6380A (formerly HP 8935)
SIGNAL GENERATOR
10 MHZ
IN
PATTERN
TRIG IN
HP-IB
TO GPIB
BOX
RF IN/OUT
OR RF INPUT 50 Ω
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
GPIB
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
EXT
REF
IN
10 MHZ
OUT
TRIGGER IN
OR
EVEN SEC
SYNCH IN
GPIB
TX TEST
CABLE
DUPLEX OUT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
RF IN/OUT
NOTE:
BNC
“T”
THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1X
TX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCE
TESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TO
PERFORM 1X RX TESTING.
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
TX TEST
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
RF INPUT
50 Ω
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TO
MPC
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
GPIB ADRS
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE:
10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO
10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER
(FIGURE F-5).
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
SYNC
MONITOR
BNC
“T”
Aug 2002
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-63
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUT
50 Ω
RX TEST
CABLE
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
SIGNAL GENERATOR
MOD TIME
BASE IN
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
SYNTHE
REF
IN
EXT
TRIG IN
GPIB
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
100-W ATT (MIN.)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
INPUT
50 Ω
10 MHZ
OUT
EXT TRIG
GPIB
INPUT 50 Ω
TX TEST
CABLE
BNC
“T”
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
RF OUT
50 Ω
BNC
“T”
2O DB IN-LINE
ATTENUATOR
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
TX TEST
CABLE
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
NOTE:
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TO
MPC
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CSM
LAN
3-64
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
Aug 2002
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
TX ATP Setup
Figure 3-19 shows a typical TX ATP setup.
Figure 3-19: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)
TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
COBRA RFDS Detail
RX
(RFM TX)
TX RF FROM BTS FRAME
TX
(RFM RX)
RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RF FEED LINE TO
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
REMOVED
Connect TX test cable between
the directional coupler input port
and the appropriate TX antenna
directional coupler connector.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-28.
40W NON-RADIATING
RF LOAD
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IN
RVS (REFLECTED)
PORT 50-OHM
TERMINATION
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
BTS INPUT
PORT
TEST
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
TX
TEST
CABLE
TX TEST
CABLE
FWD
(INCIDENT)
PORT
FW00116
ONE 20 DB 20 W IN LINE
ATTENUATOR
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-65
Calibration and Test Equipment
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-20: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)
COBRA RFDS Detail
RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RX RF FROM BTS
FRAME
RX
(RFM TX)
TX
(RFM RX)
RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RF FEED LINE TO
TX ANTENNA
REMOVED
Connect RX test cable between
the test set and the appropriate
RX antenna directional coupler.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-28.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
RX Test
Cable
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
3-66
FW00115
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Loss/Gain Offset
Background
Proper test equipment setup ensures that the test equipment and
associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that
measurements are correct.
NOTE
If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been
calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not need
to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,
communications test set, additional test equipment, associated
test cables, and adapters.)
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and
adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has
been calibrated and maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter, that
makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been replaced,
re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so can introduce
measurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements and
degradation to system performance.
NOTE
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test
equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the
overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been
allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Purpose
These procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routine
used to determine the path losses of the supported communications
analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna
switch that make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the
gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the
CDMA LMF.
GPIB Addresses
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any
address in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Options
window GPIB address box must match the addresses of the test
equipment. Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator,
13 for a power meter, and 18 for a communications system analyzer. To
verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test
equipment, refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F.
Selecting Test Equipment
Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-67
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Prerequisites
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMF
computer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab
is used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a
network connection.
Ensure the following has been completed before selecting test
equipment:
 Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
 CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification.
Table 3-30: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
Step
Action
From the Tools menu, select Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses
section of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses).
Motorola-recommended addresses are:
1 = signal generator
13 = power meter
18 = communications system analyzer
* IMPORTANT
When test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using a power
meter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzer for RF
power measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox not checked).
Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.)
Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
3-68
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the
CDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actually
communicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-31
to use the auto-detect feature.
Table 3-31: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
Step
Action
From the Tools menu, select Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on Auto-Detection (if not enabled).
Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
NOTE
Refer to the Setting GPIB addresses section of Appendix F for instructions on verifying or changing
test equipment GPIB addresses, if necessary.
When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to
search box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a signal
generator is normally 1, a power meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is
normally 18. If 1, 13,18 are included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will
be used for RF power measurements. If the test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA
analyzer is used only if a power meter is not selected.
Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will
appear in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power
meter is zeroed.
Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibrate
test equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipment
must be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-32 to calibrate the test equipment.
Table 3-32: Test Equipment Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Follow
the instructions provided.
Follow the direction provided.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-69
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-32: Test Equipment Calibration
Step
Action
Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables
The cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for the
TX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is
used to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable
configuration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibration
consists of the following procedures.
 Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any
measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used only
for the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of the
short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX
cable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX
cable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the
analyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements.
 Measure the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss. The RX
cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable with
type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX port
the test equipment.
 Measure the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is
measured. The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax
cables with type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and
an additional attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of
the path loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the
BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is
different in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set
so the TX cable configuration consists only of the required length
coax cable.
Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer
The Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used to
calibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.
NOTE
LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an
HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer type or the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer method must be used
(refer to Table 3-34 and Table 3-35). Cable calibration values
must be manually entered if the signal generator and spectrum
analyzer method is used. For the HP8921A, refer to Appendix F.
The test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to calibrate the cables.
3-70
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-33: Cable Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a
comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will be
calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TX
calibration.
Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration
picklist.
Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayed
with the results of the cable calibration.
Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to calibrate the TX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-21 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-34: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and
1930-1990 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-21, “A”) and record the value.
Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of the
diagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and
1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.
Calibration factor = A - B Example:
Cal = -1 dBm - (-53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use
the correct calibration factor.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-71
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
100W
NON-RADIA TING RF
LOAD
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION
TO THE TX PORTS DURING TX
CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX
PORTS DURING ATP TESTS.
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE
POWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATION
AND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TX
ATP TESTS.
Signal
Generator
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SECOND RF
TEST CABLE.
FW00293
3-72
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-22, if required.
Table 3-35: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.
Set signal generator to -10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824-840 MHz for 800 MHz
CDMA and 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-22, “A”) and record the value
for “A”.
Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency in the 1850-1910 MHz band. Record the value at point ‘‘B”.
Calibration factor = A - B
Example:
Cal = -12 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 2 dB
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final test
setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to
ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-22: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE OUTPUT
PORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTS
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT TEST
CABLE
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
FW00294
Setting Cable Loss Values
Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing cable calibration with use of the
applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable
loss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-73
Loss/Gain Offset
68P09255A57-2
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-36: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit >Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear.
Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
 If cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
 Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
Setting Coupler Loss Value
If an in-service coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) must be
manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration and
audit calculations and the RX FER test.
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-37: Setting Coupler Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit >Coupler Loss>TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear.
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
 The In-Service Calibration check box in the Tools>Options>BTS Options tab must checked
before entered coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit functions or RX Fer
test.
 Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3-74
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Adjusting for loss
Introduction
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. The BLOs are
subsequently downloaded to each BBX.
Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and terminates at a
backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot,
travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Each transmit
path starts at a C-CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels through the
LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path calibration
is performed, the RX path BLO will automatically be set to the default
value.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.
The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated once
each year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for all
associated RF paths after replacing any of the following components or
associated interconnecting RF cabling:
BBX board
C-CCP shelf
CIO card
CIO to LPA backplane RF cable
LPA backplane
LPA
TX filter / TX filter combiner
TX thru-port cable to the top of frame
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING
Aug 2002
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector you must first verify that there are no CDMA
channels keyed. Have the OMC-R place the sector assigned to
the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-75
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is a
high probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD.
NOTE
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of each
CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBX
boards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under test
and install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currently
being tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.
- This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that are
due for periodic optimization.
- Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correct
BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to include
BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems
Engineering documentation).
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (BLO) data
file. After calibration has been completed, this offset data must be
downloaded to the BBXs using the Download BLO function. An
explanation of the file is shown below.
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you print
out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the following
descriptions.
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a
slot Block).
Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20
contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX (see Table 3-39).
Each BBX slot header block contains:
 A creation Date and Time - broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
 The number of calibration entries - fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and
actual calibration data.
 The calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, BBX slot, and calibration point.
- The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the
contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main
receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-38: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments
3-76
Range
Assignment
C[1]-C[240]
Transmit
C[241]-C[480]
Receive
C[481]-C[720]
Diversity Receive
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
- The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Three sectors are
allowed.
Table 3-39: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX
Sectorization
TX
RX
RX Diversity
Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
11
12
3-Sector ,
1st
Carrier
3-Sector ,
3rd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
2nd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
4th
Carrier
C[1]-C[20]
C[241]-C[260]
C[481]-C[500]
C[21]-C[40]
C[261]-C[280]
C[501]-C[520]
C[41]-C[60]
C[281]-C[300]
C[521]-C[540]
C[61]-C[80]
C[301]-C[320]
C[541]-C[560]
C[81]-C[100]
C[321]-C[340]
C[561]-C[580]
C[101]-C[120]
C[341]-C[360]
C[581]-C[600]
C[121]-C[140]
C[361]-C[380]
C[601]-C[620]
C[141]-C[160]
C[381]-C[400]
C[621]-C[640]
C[161]-C[180]
C[401]-C[420]
C[641]-C[660]
C[181]-C[200]
C[421]-C[440]
C[661]-C[680]
C[201]-C[220]
C[441]-C[460]
C[681]-C[700]
C[221]-C[240]
C[461]-C[480]
C[701]-C[720]
Slot[20] (Redundant BBX-13)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
11
12
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
1st
Carrier
3-Sector ,
3rd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
2nd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
4th
Carrier
C[1]-C[20]
C[241]-C[260]
C[481]-C[500]
C[21]-C[40]
C[261]-C[280]
C[501]-C[520]
C[41]-C[60]
C[281]-C[300]
C[521]-C[540]
C[61]-C[80]
C[301]-C[320]
C[541]-C[560]
C[81]-C[100]
C[321]-C[340]
C[561]-C[580]
C[101]-C[120]
C[341]-C[360]
C[581]-C[600]
C[121]-C[140]
C[361]-C[380]
C[601]-C[620]
C[141]-C[160]
C[381]-C[400]
C[621]-C[640]
C[161]-C[180]
C[401]-C[420]
C[641]-C[660]
C[181]-C[200]
C[421]-C[440]
C[661]-C[680]
C[201]-C[220]
C[441]-C[460]
C[681]-C[700]
C[221]-C[240]
C[461]-C[480]
C[701]-C[720]
 Refer to the hard copy of the file. As you can see, 10 calibration
points per sector are supported for each branch. Two entries are
required for each calibration point.
 The first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel
(frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all even
entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from
2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to -125 dBm and 27500
corresponds to +125 dBm).
 The 20 calibration entries for each slot/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is
repeated to fill out the 10 points.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-77
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Example:
C[1]=384,
odd cal entry
= 1 ‘‘calibration point”
C[2]=19102, even cal entry
C[3]=777,
C[4]=19086,
C[19]=777,
C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this
would be repeated for the next 8 points)
 When the BBX is loaded with BLO data, the cal file data for the BBX
is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL file.
TxCal data is sent first, C[1] - C[60]. BBX slot 1’s 10 calibration
points are sent (C[1] - C[20]), followed by BBX slot 2’s 10
calibration points (C[21] - C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next,
followed by the RxDCal data.
 Temperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
slot.
Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration
Follow the steps in Table 3-40 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify the GPIB is properly connected and turned on.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in-line attenuator for 1900 MHz.
Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not
already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3-6.
 If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-32.
 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18.
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration is derived from the site CDF file.
For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList
CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB
of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
+1.5 dB.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler
option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.
3-78
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
 At sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately
42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power
measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level
(approximately -6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,
is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output
minus BBX output level.
 Example: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler
(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately
-2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately
-0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.
The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,
perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit
menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX
audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through
the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Test Pattern Drop-down Pick List
Pilot is shown as the default setting in this pick list box. The full range
of available selections and their descriptions are as follows:
Standard - performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch, and
six traffic channels with IS-97-specified gain. This pattern setting
should be used for all non-in-service calibrations and audits. Using this
pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one
MCC.
Pilot (default) - performs calibration using only the pilot channel. This
pattern setting should be used for in-service calibrations, and requires
selection of only a BBX.
CDFPilot -This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performs
calibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain
values for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting
(paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the
selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
CDF - This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to use CDF
gain settings for all channels included in the Standard pattern setting
(pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires
the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
Verify BLO
In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify
BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX
calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All
Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to
a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,
additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional
change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure
and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the
Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses
should be added into each applicable sector using the
Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss function.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-79
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Single-Sided BLO
Normally valid values are some value plus-or-minus some offset. If
single-sided BLO” is selected, the result will only be considered a
success if it’s in the lower half of the range. If it was normally success
from 37-47 (which is 42± 5), single-sided BLO” would make it a
success only if the result was from 37-42.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
 CSM-1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and data
load.
 Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
 All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
 Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-41 to perform the TX calibration test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved
since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.
Table 3-41: BTS TX Path Calibration
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
NOTE
If STANDARD, CDF or CDFPILOT is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC
must be also selected.
From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Calibration.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the
 or  key to select multiple items.)
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
3-80
From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-41: BTS TX Path Calibration
 Step
Action
NOTE
 Selecting PILOT (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
 Selecting STANDARD performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for
all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic).
Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibration
file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for the
BTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.
 BBXs being downloaded are OOS-RAM (yellow).
 TX calibration is successfully completed.
Follow the steps in Table 3-42 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-81
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-42: Download BLO
Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.
From the Device menu, select Download>BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit procedure
measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at the site. In
this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success or
failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.
NOTE
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download
to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to
performing the calibration audit.
Transmit (TX) Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,
per the steps in Table 3-43.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
 CSM-1,GLI3s, BBXs have correct code load.
 Primary CSM and MGLI3 are INS.
 All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
3-82
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
 Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
Table 3-43: BTS TX Path Audit
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be audited.
NOTE
If STANDARD or CDF is selected for Test Pattern, then at least one MCC must be also selected.
From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
NOTE
 Selecting PILOT (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
 Selecting STANDARD performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPILOT performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values
for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six
traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-83
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
All Cal/Audit Test
The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration
and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the
appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
NOTE
If the TX calibration portion of the test passed, the BLO data
will automatically be downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit
portion of the test is run.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
CSM-1, GLI3s, BBXs have correct code and data load.
Primary CSM and MGLI3 are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-44 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
WARNING
3-84
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-44: All Cal/Audit Test
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be tested.
NOTE
If STANDARD, CDF or CDFPILOT is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC
must be also selected.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Select Verify BLO or Single-sided BLO.
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
NOTE
 Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
 Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for
all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic).
Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can
be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
will exist. Note the following:
 The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-85
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
WARNING
Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can cause
interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To manually
edit the CAL file you must first logout of the BTS. If you
manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File
function the edited information will be lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
 LMF is logged in to the BTS
 BBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded
Table 3-45: Create CAL File
Step
Action
Select the applicable BBXs. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBXs.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item.
The status report window is displays the results of the action.
Click OK.
RFDS Description
The optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from the
CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:
 Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
 Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)
 Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA, and
the.LMF Help function on-line documentation.
RFDS Parameters
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match the
installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editable
parameters and their defaults. Table 3-46 explains how to edit the
parameter settings.
 RfdsEquip - valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
 TsuEquip - valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
 MC1....4 - valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(SC9600 internal RFDS only)
3-86
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
 Asu1/2Equip - valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
 TestOrigDN - valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
Any text editor may be used to open the bts-#.cdf file to verify,
view, or modify data. Because the bts-#.cdf file is generated on
a Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoft
WordPad, will display file content in a more easily-read format
than many simple text editors.
Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to review and/or edit RFDS
parameters.
Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to perform this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts-#.cdf file:
EXAMPLE:
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
Mc1Equip = 0
Mc2Equip = 0
Mc3Equip = 0
Mc4Equip = 0
RfdsEquip = 2
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’
TsuEquip = 1
NOTE
The above is an example of entries extracted from the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated
by the OMC-R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC-R if the
RFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.
Save changes and/or quit the editor.
Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session(refer to Table 3-14).
If no changes were made to the bts-#.cdf file fields listed in step 1, proceed to Step 7. If changes were
made, continue with Step 5.
* IMPORTANT
To make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)
when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.
When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts-#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to the
MGLI by performing the following:
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-87
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
5a
- To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundant
GLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelf
slot.
5b
- Click on the MGLI.
5c
- Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull-down menu.
-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation.
5d
- When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.
5e
- Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).
5f
- Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull-down menus
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).
-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the download.
5g
- Click OK to close the status report window.
5h
- Click on the MGLI.
5i
- Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull-down menu.
-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation.
5j
- When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
When the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. During
this process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2-3 minutes.
DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.
5k
- Re-seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejector
tabs.
5l
- Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTS
menu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus.
Any MCCs which were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, re-enabled, and
downloaded with code as follows:
6a
- Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar and
clicking on MCCs in the pull-down menu.
6b
- In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull-down menu.
-- A status window report window is displayed showing status of the operation.
6c
- Click OK to close the status report window.
6d
- Download data to the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-21.
6e
- When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-24.
Click on the RFDS tab.
Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:
8a
- Click on the SUA to select it.
. . . continued on next page
3-88
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
8b
- Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull-down menu.
-- A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.
8c
- Click OK to close the status report window.
* IMPORTANT
If the LMF displays an error message, check the following:
Ensure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify RFDS has power.
Verify RFDS status LED is green.
Verify entries in RFDS fields of the bts-#.cdf file are correct (refer to step 1).
Status the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the proper
state (INS_ACT (bright green)).
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to be
programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or
be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be
programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number
during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be
recorded for each BTS used for OMC-R RFDS software configuration.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
installation of the RFDS.
Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM
Table 3-47 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-47: Definition of Parameters
Access Overload Code
Slot Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary Channel A
Primary Channel B
Secondary Channel A
Secondary Channel B
These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation
of the system.
Lock Code
Security Code
Service Level
Station Class Mark
Do NOT change.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-89
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-47: Definition of Parameters
IMSI MCC
IMSI 11 12
These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts-# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN Phone Number
These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN
and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file. The
MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN is
the number the subscriber calls.
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-48 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out-of-range, the RFDS will error out.
Table 3-48: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
Access Overload Code
15
Slot Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary Channel A
25
1175
Primary Channel B
25
1175
Secondary Channel A
25
1175
Secondary Channel B
25
1175
Lock Code
999
Security Code
999999
Service Level
N/A
N/A
Station Class Mark
255
IMSI 11 12
99
IMSI MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
MIN Phone Number
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.
Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is not
installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is
required if an RFDS is installed.
Prerequisite
 LMF is logged into the BTS
Follow the procedure in Table 3-49 to set antenna map data for the
RFDS.
3-90
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-49: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull-down menus.
- A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear.
In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to select
the antenna map to be edited.
Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the column
where entry or editing is needed.
Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-Antenna Map... section of LMF Help function
on-line documentation for antenna map examples.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
 Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.
 Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered.
Prerequisite
 LMF is logged into the BTS
NOTE
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the
antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-50 to set RFDS configuration data.
Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull-down
menus.
- A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear.
In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configuration
tab, as required.
To add a new antenna number, perform the following:
3a
- Click on the Add Row button.
3b
- Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-91
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
3c
Action
- Enter the desired data.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Help
function on-line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
 Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.
 Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX
paths.
TX Path Calibration - For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS
XCVR is keyed at a pre-determined power level and the BTS power
output level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measured
at the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring test
equipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference
(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at the
TX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration
offset value.
RX Path Calibration - For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is
keyed at a pre-determined power level and the power input level is
measured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power level
measured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directional
coupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)
between the RFDS-keyed power level and power level measured at the
BTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
RFDS calibration and the CAL file - The TX and RX RFDS
calibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]
Block.
TSIC channel frequency - For each RFDS TSIC, the channel
frequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of the
appropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-51.
3-92
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-51: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies
WARNING
System
Channel Calibration Points
800 MHz (A and B)
341 and 682
1.9 GHz
408 and 791
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
RFDS Calibration Procedure
Prerequisites
 Test equipment has been selected.
 Test equipment and test cables have been calibrated.
 TX calibration has been performed and BLO data has been
downloaded to the BBXs.
 Test equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.
 Antenna map data has been entered for the site.
 BBXs are INS_TEST.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-52 to perform RFDS calibration.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-93
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-52: RFDS Calibration
Step
In the LMF, select the FRAME tab.
If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTS menu bar to select it.
Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration
(refer to Table 1-5 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).
Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull-down menu.
- An RFDS Calibration set-up window will be displayed.
In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required
Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-51) in the Channel Field box.
Action
 To enter more than one channel number, use the following methods:
- Separate non-sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces;
for example: 247,585,742.
- Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the range
separated by a dash and no spaces;
for example: 385-395.
If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrl
key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)-sector(s)).
Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list.
10
In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate transfer rate (1=9600, 2=14400) from the drop-down list.
11
12
Click on the OK button.
- A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
13
When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.
14
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
15
Click on the Frame tab.
16
Select the MGLI by clicking on it.
17
Download the CAL file, now updated with the RFDS offset data, to the MGLI by clicking on Device
on the BTS menu bar, and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus.
NOTE
The MGLI will automatically transfer the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.
Program TSU NAM
The NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test
calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
 MGLI is INS_ACT (bright green).
 SUA is powered up and has a code load.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-53 to program the TSU NAM.
3-94
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Adjusting for loss
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-53: Program NAM Procedure
Step
Action
In the LMF, select the RFDS tab.
Select the SUA by clicking on it.
Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull-down menu.
- A NAM programming window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-47 and Table 3-48) .
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-95
Alarms
68P09255A57-2
Alarms
The alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the
optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the
RF cabinet is receiving the appropriate alarms from the power cabinet.
The SC 4812ET is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer
defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface
to the 50-pin punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”
during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the
alarms and monitoring the LMF for state-transition messages from the
active MGLI3.
All customer alarms are routed through the 50 pair punchblock located
in the I/O compartment at the back of the frame. Testing is best
accomplished by using a specialized connector that interfaces to the
50-pair punchblock. This connector is wired so that customer return 1 (2
for the B side) is connected to every input, CDI 0 through CDI 17.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included:
 The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,
Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.
To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options button
and highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press
the Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of
selections) while clicking on the desired levels.
 The Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.
When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to
Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms
will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is
clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.
 The Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.
New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be
displayed.
 The Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor
display.
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test
Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.
3-96
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Alarms
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-54: Heat Exchanger Alarm
Step
Action
Turn circuit breaker “B” of the Heat Exchanger circuit breakers OFF. This will generate a Heat
Exchanger alarm, ensure that the LMF reports the correct alarm condition in the RF Cabinet.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #25 - “Heat Exchanger Alarm” makes contact.
Turn the circuit breaker “B” ON. Ensure that the alarm condition is now removed.
NOTE
The Heat Exchanger will go through the Start Up sequence.
Door Alarm
Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.
NOTE
When conducting this test connect the LMF via the LAN port on
the back of the frame thru the Rear I/O Door.
Table 3-55: Door Alarm
Step
Action
Close all doors on the power cabinet. Ensure that no alarms are reported on the LMF.
Individually open and then close each power supply cabinet door. Ensure that the LMF reports an
alarm when each door is opened.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 “Door Alarm” makes contact.
AC Fail Alarm
Table 3-56 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.
Table 3-56: AC Fail Alarm
Step
Action
NOTE
The batteries should have a stable charge before performing this test.
Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet OFF. The LMF should report an alarm on an AC Fail
(Rectifier Fail, Minor Alarm & Major Alarm) condition.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #23, BTS # 21, BTS # 24 and BTS Relay # 29 “AC
Fail Alarm” makes contact respectively.
Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet ON. The AC Fail alarm should clear.
Minor Alarm
Table 3-57 gives instructions on testing minor alarm.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-97
Alarms
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-57: Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) power switch OFF. This will generate a minor
alarm. Verify that the minor alarm LED (amber) is illuminated on the Meter Alarm Panel and the
LMF reports this minor alarm.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #24 “Minor Alarm” makes contact.
Turn the TCP power switch ON. The alarm condition should clear.
Rectifier Alarms
The following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiple
rectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a six rectifier
system.
Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System)
Table 3-58 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a three rectifier system.
Table 3-58: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Remove a single rectifier module and place it into the unused rectifier shelf #2.
Turn the AC breaker OFF, for this 2nd shelf.
Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED
(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifier
fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.
Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions.
NOTE
Alarm conditions reported as BTS #24 and BTS #21, contacts respectively.
Turn the AC breaker for the 2nd shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and minor alarm conditions
clear on the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF.
Multiple Rectifier Failure
Table 3-59 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a three rectifier system.
Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step
Action
With the rectifier module still in the unused shelf position fromTable 3-58 test procedures, turn the
AC breaker for the 1st shelf OFF.
Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite two RED fail LED
(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail and
Major Alarm). The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.
. . . continued on next page
3-98
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Alarms
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step
Action
Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29, BTS #21, and BTS #24)
Turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.
Return the rectifier module to its original location. This completes the alarm test on the power cabinet.
Single Rectifier Failure
(Six Rectifier System)
Table 3-60 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a six rectifier system.
Table 3-60: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Remove two(2) rectifier modules from shelf #2.
Turn the AC breaker OFF, for shelf #2.
Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED
(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifier
fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.
Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions. (BTS #24 and BTS #21)
Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and Minor Alarm conditions have
cleared.
Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System)
Table 3-61 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or
major alarm in a six rectifier system.
Table 3-61: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step
Action
Replace one rectifier module previously removed and turn the AC breaker for this shelf, OFF.
Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite a RED fail LED,
and the Meter Alarm Panel will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail, Major and Minor Alarm).The
RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.
Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29)
Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.
Return all rectifier module to their original location. This completes the rectifier alarm tests on the
power cabinet.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-99
Alarms
68P09255A57-2
Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional)
CAUTION
Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, or
damaging battery cases when using a power heat gun.
Table 3-62 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-62: Battery Over Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Use a low powered heat gun and gently heat the battery over temperature sensor (see location in
Figure 3-23). Do Not hold the hot air gun closer than 7.6 cm (3 in.) to the sensor. This will avoid
burning the cable insulation.
When the sensor is heated to approximately 50° C, a battery Over Temperature alarm is generated.
NOTE
An audible click will sound as K1 contact engage and K2 contacts disengage.
Visually inspect the K1 and K2 relays to verify state changes. The LMF should be displaying correct
alarms. (BTS #22)
Verify that the CHARGE DISABLE LED (amber) on the Meter Alarm Panel and the BATTERY
MAIN LED (green) are both illuminated.
Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contact return to normal position
(K1 open and K2 closed). Use the LMF verify that all alarms have cleared.
3-100
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Alarms
68P09255A57-2
Figure 3-23: Battery Over-temperature Sensor
FW00408
Buss Bar
6 AWG Cables
Battery Overtemp Sensor
Negative Temperature Compensation Sensor
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-101
Alarms
68P09255A57-2
Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm
NOTE
This is connector J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself,
this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at the rear of
the cabinet.
Table 3-63 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-63: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Remove the J8 link on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel (see Figure 3-24 for J8 location).
NOTE
This is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connector
bulkhead at the rear of the cabinet.
Verify that RECTIFIER OVERTEMP LED (red) is lite. Contacts on K1 and K2 change states (K1
now closed and K2 open).
Verify that the LMF has reported an alarm condition. (BTS #26)
Reinstall J8 connector and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared. K1 and K2 should now be in
their normal states (K1 open and K2 closed).
This completes the system tests of the SC 4812ET power cabinet.
Figure 3-24: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel
FRONT VIEW
VOLT
AMP
AMPS
VOLT
PWR
TEST POINTS
TEST POINTS
OFF ON
REAR VIEW
J1
J2
YEL
VIOLENT
OR
J3
J8
J9
J6
J4
J5
Terminal Block
RED BLK OR BRWN
Terminal Block
Rear Connector Panel
J4
J5
Not
Used
J6
J1
J2
J3
FW00245
3-102
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Before Leaving the site
68P09255A57-2
Before Leaving the site
Table 3-64 gives instructions on what to check before leaving the site.
Table 3-64: Check Before Leaving the Site
Step
Action
Verify that ALL battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are CLOSED (pushed in).
Verify that the Heat Exchanger is running.
Verify that the Meter Alarm Panel and TCP modules are switched ON.
Verify that the Battery Test Switch on the Meter Alarm Panel is in the OFF position.
Verify that no alarm conditions are being reported (with all doors closed).
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
3-103
Before Leaving the site
68P09255A57-2
Notes
3-104
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Chapter 4
Automated Test Procedures (ATP)
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
4-1
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
ATP Tests
Introduction
The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Motorola
Cellular Field Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all
equipped BTS subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility
(LMF) and supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File
(CDF) assignment.
The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a
file that can be printed. All tests are controlled via the LMF platform
using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment
supported by the LMF can be used.
This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is
the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of
simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying
commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution
of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel
the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the
progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer
to LMF CLI Commands.
NOTE
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the ”CAVEATS”
section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any
applicable information.
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the LMF.
Reduced ATP
NOTE
Equipment has been factory-tested for FCC compliance. If
license-governing bodies require documentation supporting
SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.
Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS
site are NOT required.
After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the
Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) must perform these procedures (minimal
recommendation):
Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit
and FER tests.
Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.
Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the
Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the
failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,
refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix section (Table B-1)
to determine the applicable test that must be performed.
4-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward
link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the
additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and
TX code domain.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test set
components, if required.
Customer requirements determine which ATP tests are to be performed
and the field engineer selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.
The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
 All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.
These include the GLI3, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and
passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter,
and RF cables.
 All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.
These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion
frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI3 cards and the passive
components including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.
 All TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.
 Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, download BLO, and
TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.
ATP Test Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:
 BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
 CSMs, GLI3s, BBXs, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)have
correct code load and data load
WARNING
Primary CSM and GLI3 are INS_ACT
MCCs are INS_ACT.
BBXs are OOS-RAM.
BBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.
Test cables are calibrated.
Test equipment is selected.
Test equipment is connected for ATP tests.
Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.
GPIB is on.
Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned OFF
(circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are properly
terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or
equipment damage.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
4-3
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
TX/RX OUT Connections
NOTE
Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At sites
with RFDS, all measurements are through the RFDS directional
coupler TX OUT connector.
ATP Test Procedure
There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to
completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the
following ATP testing options should be run. Table 4-1 provides the
procedure to execute an ATP test. To completely test a BTS, run the ATP
tests according to one of the following ATP testing options.
ATP Testing Option 1
 All TX/RX test
ATP Testing Option 2
 All TX test
 All RX test
ATP Testing Option 3
 TX Mask test
 Rho test
 Pilot Time Offset test
 Code Domain Power test
 FER test
NOTE
The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX path
calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.
NOTE
If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,
remove the manual control/system memory card from the card
slot and set the IO CONFIG to the Talk & Listen mode before
starting the automated testing.
CDMA 2000 Testing
Software release 2.16.x supports two new pieces of test equipment.
These are the Agilent E4406A with E4432B, as well as the Advantest
R3267 with R3562. The E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562
pair, should be connected together using a GPIB cable. This test
equipment is capable of performing tests in both IS95 mode as well as
cdma2000 mode if the required options are installed:
The HP 8935 with option 200 or R2k for 1X TX and with Agilent
E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER (see note for options).
NOTE
4-4
E4432B Signal Generator” for 1X FER. The options are:
UN8-Real Time I/Q Baseband Generator
1E5-High Stability Timebase
201-Real Time CDMA2000
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual ATP tests can be used to verify the results of
specific tests:
Spectral Purity TX Mask
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform,
generated on each sector, meets the transmit spectral mask specification
with respect to the assigned CDF file values.
Waveform Quality (rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in
ANSI-J_STD-019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and
perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents
100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot
Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).
Code Domain Power
This test verifies code domain power levels, which have been set for all
ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < -27 dB .
Frame Error Rate
The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire
CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all
respective sector/antennas. The test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all
traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at
an RF input level of -119 dBm (or -116 dBm if using TMPC). Follow
the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
NOTE
Aug 2002
The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
4-5
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
ATP Test Procedure
Table 4-1 describes the step-by-step procedures to run any APT Test.
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Select the device(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select the desired test.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier - bts# - sector# - carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier
pick list.
To select multiple items, hold down the  or  key while making the selections.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the cbsc-n.cdf
file for the BTS.
If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
For RX select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list.
In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the
drop-down list.
NOTE
10
11
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop-down list: Pilot
(default), CDF, CDFPilot or Standard.
Click OK.
The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
Click Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
If Dismiss is used the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
Background: Tx Mask Test
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same
command. All measurements are through the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only). BBX2 power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler).
4-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
NOTE
TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power level
to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gain
set to 541.
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution
bandwidth with respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel,
measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth, in dB, verifying that results meet
system tolerances at the following test points:
 1.9 GHz
- at least -45 dB @ + 885 kHz from center frequency
- at least -45 dB @ - 885 kHz from center frequency
 800 MHz:
- at least -55 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
- at least -55 dB @ - 750 kHz from center frequency
- at least -60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency
- at least -60 dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequency
The BBX2 then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency
Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
+ 1980 kHz
- 1980 kHz
- 900 kHz
- 750 kHz
Aug 2002
+ 900 kHz
+750 kHz
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
FW00282
4-7
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
Background: Rho Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up
using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier
(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX2 power output is
set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS
or RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that
result meets system tolerances. Waveform quality (rho) should be
> 0.912 (-0.4 dB).
The BBX2 then de-keys and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned
to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.
The LMF Tests menu list item, Rho, performs the waveform quality test
for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX
output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
will be via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements from
the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using both
bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
Time Offset in uS, verifying results meet system tolerances. Pilot Time
Offset should be within < 3 µs of the target PT Offset (0 mS).
The BBX2 then de-keys, and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned
to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.
4-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
Background: Code Domain Power Test
This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX2 carrier
keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.
All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by
the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262 and all
MCC channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal
Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes, and are
assigned a full-rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to
be tested at any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32
CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made, so all channel
elements are verified on all sectors.
BBX2 power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT
connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
Code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD numbered
Walsh channels, are verified using the OCNS command. This is done by
verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels
measures < -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
The BBX2 then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned
to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.
Upon completion of the test, OCNS is disabled on the specified
MCC/CE.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
4-9
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< -27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Showing all OCNS Passing
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE - EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE - DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE - EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< -27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
Indicating Failures
64
FW00283
Background: FER Test
This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently
configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input
level of -119 dBm [or -116 dBm if using Tower Top Amplifier
(TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set as
the signal source controlled by the same command. All measurements
will be via the LMF.
The pilot gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up using
only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel
element only). BBX2 power output is set to -20 dBm as measured at the
TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
The BBX2 must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive circuitry.
4-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode
and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse
link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying the
results meet the following specification: FER returned less than 1% and
total frames measured is 1500.
All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The
BBX then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned to
the current RX antenna paths under test. The test is then repeated.
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the
results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to
close the status report window. The ATP report will not be updated if the
status reports window is closed with use of the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for
each test:
Test name
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and create a printable file
for the ATP report of a BTS.
Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report
Step
Action
Click on the Login tab if it is not in the forefront.
Select the desired BTS from the Available Base Stations pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Sort the report if desired by clicking on a column heading.
Click on the Dismiss button if you do not want to create a printable file copy.
To create a printable file, select the desired file type in the picklist and then click on the Save button.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
4-11
ATP Tests
68P09255A57-2
Notes
4-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Chapter 5
Prepare to Leave the Site
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
5-1
Initializing Active Service
68P09255A57-2
Initializing Active Service
External Test Equipment Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal
Step
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the rear of the frame.
CAUTION
Verify all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct
ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will cause system
degradation of call processing.
Reset All Devices
Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The CBSC
configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code
on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data
and code when the span is active again.
Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC
Updated CAL file information is moved from the LMF Windows
environment back to the CBSC which resides in a Unix environment.
The procedures that follow detail how to move files from the Windows
environment to the CBSC.
Copying CAL files from LMF to a Disk
Follow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a LMF
computer to a 3.5 diskette.
Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette
Step
Action
Insert a disk into your Windows A drive.
NOTE
If your disk has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The disk must be DOS formatted
before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or online helps on how to
format diskettes.
Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from your Programs menu list.
Click on your C: drive.
Double Click on the wlmf folder.
Double Click on the CDMA folder.
5-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Initializing Active Service
68P09255A57-2
Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette
Step
Action
Click on the bts-# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.
Drag the BTS-#.cal file to the 3-1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the
mouse button.
Continue step 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired and close the Windows Explorer
program by selecting Close from the File menu option.
Copying CAL files from diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedure in Table 5-3 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC
Step
Action
Log into the CBSC workstation.
Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.
Enter eject -q and press the Enter key.
Enter mount and press the Enter key. Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.
NOTE
If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.
Enter ls -lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts-#.cal file is on the disk.
Enter cd and press the Enter key.
Enter pwd and press the Enter key. Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/).
Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts-#.cal bts-#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is the BTS
number).
10
Enter ls -l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.
11
Enter eject and press the Enter key.
12
Remove the floppy disk from the workstation.
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification
Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3
boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be
verified.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
5-3
Initializing Active Service
68P09255A57-2
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the
MGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and line
code configuration (in bold type):
span view 
Observe a display similar to the options shown below:
COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A - Default (0-131
Span B - Default (0-131
Span C - Default (0-131
Span
D - D
Default
f lt (0
(0-131
131
Span E - Default (0-131
Span F - Default (0-131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Oh
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0-40 m for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
If the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct
choice, proceed to Table 5-5.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
5-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Initializing Active Service
68P09255A57-2
Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port Connection
RS-232 CABLE
FROM LMF COM1
PORT
GLI BOARD
NULL MODEM BOARD
(PART# 8484877P01)
9-PIN TO 9- PIN
RS-232 CABLE
MMI SERIAL PORT
REF- FW00344
Set BTS Site Span Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3
boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be
configured.
NOTE
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations
loaded in the MGLI3/GLI3s do not match those in the
OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact
configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span
configuration data will render the site inoperable.
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the
front panel of the MGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-17).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
5-5
Initializing Active Service
68P09255A57-2
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters
to match that of the physical spans a - f run to the site:
span_config     
option#1 = the span to change (a - f)
option#2 = the span type (0 - 8):
0 - E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC-4)
1 - E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)
2 - E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC-4, TS16)
3 - E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)
4 - T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
5 - T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)
6 - J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
7 - J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
8 - T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps
option#4 = the span equalization (0 - 7):
0 - T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)
1 - T1_4 (T1,J1:393-524 feet)
2 - T1_4 (T1,J1:131-262 feet)
3 - E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)
4 - T1_4 (T1,J1:0-131 feet)
5 - T1_4 (T1,J1:524-655 feet)
6 - T1_4 (T1,J1:262-393 feet)
7 - E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)
option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 - 31)
Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120-Ohm, LAPD channel 1:
span_config a 1 64 7 1
span_config f 1 64 7 1
Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0-131 feet), LAPD channel 0:
span_config a 5 64 4 0
span_config f 5 64 4 0
* IMPORTANT
5-6
Make sure that spans a - f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be
different for each individual span.
After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI3/SGLI3 board MUST be reset and
re-loaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at
the site.
Press the RESET button on the GLI3 for changes to take effect.
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Initializing Active Service
68P09255A57-2
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI3
and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI3/SGLI3 boards.
Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.
Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors which
were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-6.
Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections
Step
Action
Connect the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block for the spans.
Ensure that the CSU is powered ON.
Verify the span status.
LMF Removal
CAUTION
DO NOT power down the CDMA LMF without performing the
procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may result,
and in some cases, the CDMA LMF may lock up.
Follow the procedures in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and
remove the terminal.
Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF
Step
Action
From the CDMA window select File>Exit.
From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows
message appears.
Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.
Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as required
for equipment transport.
Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1
NOTE
Aug 2002
After all activities at the site have been completed, including
disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the OMC-R and
request the BTS be placed under control of the OMC-R.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
5-7
Initializing Active Service
68P09255A57-2
5-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-1
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Troubleshooting
Overview
The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot any Login Failure
problem during normal operation.
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
6-2
Step
Action
If MGLI3 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI3 by re-seating it. If this
persists, install RGLI3 card in MGLI3 slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate no Ethernet
termination at top of frame.
Verify that T1 is disconnected at the Channel Signaling Unit (CSU). If T1 is still connected,
verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI3.
Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in front of the BTS.
Verify the LMF was configured properly.
Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).
Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly.
Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary
port.
Try connecting to the I/O panel (back of frame). Use Tri-Ax to BNC adapter at the LMF port for
this connection.
10
Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI3 and retry.
12
Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter
Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter
communication failure.
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
Step
Action
Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GP-IB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test Equipment setup section
of Chapter 3 for details.
Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.
Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communication
analyzer failure.
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
Step
Action
Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup.
Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment setup section
for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB
Box and retry.
If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.
Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18
Verify the analyzer is in Talk and Listen not Control mode.
Code Download Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot any code download
failure.
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
Step
Aug 2002
Action
Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.
Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-3
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
Step
Action
Communication to MGLI3 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS
device. MGLI3 must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it. If this persists,
replace card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat card and try again.
If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK. Status it.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the
device and reset.
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot any data download
failure.
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
Step
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the card. Refer to
Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to the
device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it is
enabled.
The three states that devices can be displayed:
 Enabled (green, INS)
 Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
 Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot device enable failure.
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
6-4
Step
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell
site location and GPS sync.
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
Step
Action
Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.
The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled.
LPA Errors
Follow the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot any LPA errors.
Table 6-7: LPA Errors
Step
Action
If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an
MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection. Enter ALARMS in the
Hyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.
(Call Field Support for further assistance.)
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration
failure.
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
Step
Aug 2002
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section) and
connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts-#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:
For 1900 MHz:
BandClass=1; FreqBand=16
For 800 MHz:
BandClass=0; FreqBand=8
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling
the circuit breaker, and after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor
head.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off
and on) the GPIB Box and retry.
Verify sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref
signal.
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-5
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
Step
Action
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will
show “RES :’’
Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan.
Calibration Audit Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit
failure.
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
Step
Action
Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of chapter
3).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor
head.
Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the
circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power
Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBX2s before auditing. Click on the
BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO
Re-try the audit.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off
and on) the GP-IB Box and retry.
Forward link problem
If the BTS passes the reduced ATP tests but has a forward link problem
during normal operation follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to
troubleshoot.
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)
 Step
6-6
Action
Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:
- TX mask
- TX rho
- TX code domain
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX Mask
Measurement failure.
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the LPA by pulling
the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rhoand pilot time
offset measurement failure.
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.
Re-load MGLI3 data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling
the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the
GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error). Go to the freq. bar in the
upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press  and enter 10, to obtain an
average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may
need to be re-initialized.
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot code domain and
noise floor measurement failure.
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
Step
Aug 2002
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-7
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot carrier measurement
failure.
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure
Step
Action
Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability 10 MHz
Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to test set-up.
Multi-FER Test Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot multi-FER failure.
Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
 Step
Action
Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.
Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellow
LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS-ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on
extent of failure).
Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may be
resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.
This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,
some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model AB
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. RF-GPS
(Local GPS) - CSM kit SGLN1145, which should be installed in Slot l,
has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not
have a GPS receiver.
Remote GPS (R-GPS) - Kit SGLN4132ED or later, which should be
installed in both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any
incorrectly configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not
attempt to change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the
GPS antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended
guidelines.
6-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board
back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or
higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of
CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.
Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM
board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error
This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in
the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132
must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to
function correctly.
CSM Kit No.
SGLN1145
SGLN4132ED
or later
Hardware Configuration
CSM Slot No.
Reference Source Configuration
With GPS Receiver
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Without GPS Receiver
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS
This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy
flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPS
and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite
should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellites
should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verify
correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-9
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
C-CCP Backplane
The C-CCP backplane is a multi-layer board that interconnects all the
C-CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will
allow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:
 Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
 Allow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” ISB (Inter Shelf Bus)
connectors
The 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the master
GLI3 to all other GLI3s in the modem frame. Its basic function is to
provide clock synchronization from the master GLI3 to all other GLI3s
in the frame.
The ISB is also provides the following functions:
 Groom span line when a single span is used for multiple cages.
 Provide MMI connection to/from the master GLI3 to cell site modem.
 Provide interface between GLI3s and the AMR (for reporting BTS
alarms).
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8 pin RJ-45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI3 in the C-CCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI3 and also all the BBX traffic.
Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)
Provides a +27 Volt input for use by the power supply modules.
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C-CCP backplane. These
include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin
interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver
Power Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 Volts
to be used by the C-CCP shelf cards.
GLI3 Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6-conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI3s in the C-CCP backplane.
6-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
GLI3 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the C-CCP backplane and routed
to the GLI3 board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI3 and the other GLI3, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX2 Connector
Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6-conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C-CCP backplane.
CIO Connectors
 RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri-Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low-noise-amplified signals via the
C-CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to
the appropriate BBX.
 A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the
backplane, then on to the MCC slots.
 Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Each
output is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate
BBX.
 TX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to
the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to
the LPAs in the LPA shelf.
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure
The following table provides a standard procedure for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective C-CCP backplane. The
table is broken down into possible problems and steps which should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
NOTE
It is important to note that all steps be followed before replacing
ANY C-CCP backplane.
Digital Control Problems
No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-16 for problems with GLI3 control.
Table 6-16: No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s)
Step
Action
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-11
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (All
GLI3s)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-17 for problems with GLI3 control.
Table 6-17: No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI3s)
Step
Action
Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLI3s are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.
Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI3 for proper connection and
damage.
MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3
Follow the procedure in Table 6-18 for problems with GLI3 control.
Table 6-18: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLI3s are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.
No AMR Control (MGLI3 good)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-19 for problems with AMR control.
Table 6-19: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over AMR
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX Control in the Shelf
Follow the procedure in Table 6-20 for problems with co-located GLI3.
Table 6-20: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3s
Step
6-12
Action
Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.
Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Follow the procedure in Table 6-21 for problems with span line traffic.
Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to 1 BBX, replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel Elements
Follow the procedure in Table 6-22 for problems with channel elements.
Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements
Step
Action
Verify channel elements on a co-located MCC of the same
MCC8E = 0; MCC24E = 2; MCC-1X = 3)
type (CDF MccType codes:
Check MCC connectors (both module and backplane) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace it with a known good MCC of the same
type.
If no channel elements on any MCC, verify clock reference to CIO.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-13
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
DC Power Problems
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the
BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a second
person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,
and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Follow the procedure in Table 6-23 for problems with DC input voltage.
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame. Verify there are no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and
attempt to reset it.
- If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
- If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub-assembly within the
shelf.
Verify that the C-CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.
Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C-CCP backplane by
measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.
- If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
- If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power
feed clip on the distribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the
clip for damage.
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.
Replace the power supply module with a known good module.
If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, the C-CCP backplane failure (possibly an open
trace) has occurred.
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI3,
BBX2, or Switchboard
Follow the procedure in Table 6-24 for problems with DC input voltage.
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify steps outlined in Table 6-23 have been performed.
Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.
Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
Follow the procedure in Table 6-25 for problems with DC input voltage.
6-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back-plane connectors for damage in all the affected
board slots.
Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.
RFDS
The RFDS is used to perform Pre-Calibration Verification and
Post-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate and
reported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through the
directional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to the
following tables.
All tests fail
Follow the procedure in Table 6-26 for problems with RFDS.
Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail
Step
Action
Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator output
attenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzer
rf input port.
Set the signal generator output attenuator to -90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that the
spectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cable
insertion loss), and the approximate frequency.
Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects to
the RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.
Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.
Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.
Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check (both
board and backplane) for damage.
Replace any boards that do not show green with known good boards one at a time in the following
order. Re-test after each is replaced.
- RFDS ASU board.
- RFDS Transceiver board.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-15
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
All RX and TX paths fail
If every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies with
the rf converter board or the transceiver board. Refer to Table 6-27 for
fault isolation procedures.
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths fail
Step
Action
Visually check the master RF converter board (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the RF converter board with a known good RF converter board.
Visually check RXCVR TSU (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the TSU with a known good TSU.
All tests fail on a single antenna
If all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,
follow the procedures in Table 6-28 checks.
Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna path
Step
Action
Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antenna
port.
Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on the
RFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.
Visually check ASU connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the ASU with a known good ASU.
Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.
NOTE
Externally route the cable to bypass suspect segment.
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
6-16
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI3, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
 Solid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
 Solid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
CSM LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS-RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS-ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
 Solid GREEN - module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
 Solid RED - Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
 Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.
 Long RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm.
 Rapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm or
INS_ACT in DUMB mode.
Aug 2002
Short RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm.
Long GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
Off - no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
Solid YELLOW - After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-17
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
. . . continued on next page
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector - Only accessible behind front panel. The
RS-232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in
the development or factory environment, but may be used in the
field for debug/maintenance purposes.
6-18
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
GLI3 LED Status Combinations
The GLI3 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-2.
The indicators and controls consist of:
 Four LEDs
 One pushbutton
ACTIVE LED
Solid GREEN - GLI3 is active. This means that the GLI3 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off - GLI3 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI3 should be
active.
MASTER LED
 Solid GREEN - GLI3 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI3).
 Off - GLI3 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM LED
 Solid RED - GLI3 is in a fault condition or in reset.
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI3 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI3 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
 Off - No Alarm.
STATUS LED
 Flashing GREEN- GLI3 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
 On - GLI3 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
 Off - GLI3 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS LED
 Solid GREEN - Span line is connected and operating.
 Solid RED - Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-19
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
GLI3 Pushbuttons and Connectors
RESET Pushbutton - Depressing the RESET pushbutton
causes a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.
GLI3 will be placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector - The RS-232MMI port connector is intended
to be used primarily in the development or factory environment
but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
Figure 6-2: GLI3 Front Panel Operating Indicators
LED
OPERATING STATUS
Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.
ALARM
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)
Span
OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN − operating normally
YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
MMI
STATUS
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON − active card operating normally
OFF − standby card operating normally
6-20
100BASE-T to
BTS Packet Router
or Expansion cage
100BASE-T
Auxiliary Monitor
Port
Dual 100BASE-T
in a single RJ45
to Redundant
(Mate) GLI3
Reset Switch
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
ACT
RESET
STA
Supports the cross−coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using a
standard ethernet straight cable.
SPAN
GLI
MMI
Wired as an ethernet hub for direct connection to a personal comput−
er with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of ethernet
7sniffer" when the ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon−
itoring.
ALARM
RESET
AUX
GLI
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an
ethernet hub.
AUX
BPR B
BPR B
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an
ethernet hub.
BPR A
BPR A
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
BBX LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
Solid GREEN - INS_ACT no alarm
Solid RED Red - initializing or power-up alarm
Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm
Long RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm
Rapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm
Short RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm
Long GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT alarm
MCC LED Status Combinations
The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below. See Figure 6-3. Note that the figure does not show the connectors
as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
 RED - fault on module
ACTIVE LED
 Off - module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
 Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.
 Rapidly Flashing Green - OOS_RAM no alarm.
 Solid GREEN - module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
 Solid RED - module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
 The RS-232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
 The RJ-11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-21
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LED
COLOR
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up and during failure
=conditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE
RED
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING − Card is code−loaded but
=not enabled
SLOW BLINKING − Card is not code−loaded
ON − card is code−loaded and enabled
=(INS_ACTIVE)
ON − fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) − CHI
=bus inactive on power−up
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module contains a bi-color LED just above the MMI
connector on the ETIB module. Interpret this LED as follows:
 GREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
 Flashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
 Flashing RED — LPA is in alarm.
Span Problems
(No Control Link)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-29 when troubleshooting a control link
failure.
6-22
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure
Step
Action
Verify the span settings using the span view command on the active master GLI3 MMI
port. If these are set correctly, verify the edlc parameters using the show command. Any
alarms conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
- Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the mobility manager
(MM) and verify that the looped signal is good.
- Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from base site and MM.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
6-23
Troubleshooting
68P09255A57-2
Notes
6-24
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
A
Appendix A
System Data
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-1
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Site Operation Verification
Verification of Test Equipment Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer
Model
Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
Deliveries
Per established procedures
Floor Plan
Verified
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Factory Data:
BBX
Test Panel
RFDS
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Site Temperature
Dress Covers/Brackets
Aug 2002
Comments
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-3
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK
Parameter
Specification
Shelf ID Dip Switches
Per site equipage
Ethernet LAN verification
Verified per procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests
Table A3a: Pre-power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Pre-power-up tests
Specification
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications
Internal Cables:
ISB (all cages)
CSM (all cages)
Power (all cages)
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
Ethernet Boots
Air Impedance Cage (single cage)
installed
Initial power-up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications:
Comments
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-5
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
General Optimization Checklist
Table A3b: Pre-power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
LEDs
Frame fans
illuminated
operational
LMF to BTS Connection
Preparing the LMF
Log into the LMF PC
Create site specific BTS directory
Download device loads
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
per procedure
per procedure
Download/Enable MGLI3s
Download/Enable GLI3s
Set Site Span Configuration
Download CSMs
Enable CSMs
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCCs*
Download BBXs*
Download TSU (in RFDS)
Program TSU NAM
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
Test Set Calibration
per procedure
Comments
*MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s or MCC-1Xs. BBXs may be BBXs or BBX-1Xs
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
Initial Position Accuracy:
Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in
msec and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-7
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
LFR Receiver Operation
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
Station call letters M X Y Z
assignment.
SN ratio is > 8 dB
LFR Task State: 1fr
locked to station xxxx
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
as specified in site
documentation
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter
OK
Comments
CARRIER
LPA
Specification
4:1 & 2:1
3-Sector
2:1
6-Sector
Dual BP
3-Sector
Dual BP
6-Sector
1A
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1B
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1C
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1D
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
2A
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2B
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2C
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2D
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
3A
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3B
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3C
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3D
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
4A
C4
C2
No Alarms
4B
C4
C2
No Alarms
4C
C4
C2
No Alarms
4D
C4
C2
No Alarms
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-9
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations
1-Carrier
2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels
4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-7, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-4, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-5, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-6, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-10, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-1 1, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-12, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
. . . continued on next page
A-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX-7, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-4, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-5, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-6, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-10, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-1 1, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-12, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
2-Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Calibrate
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
Comments
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-11
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX-7, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-7, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
3-Carrier Adjacent Channels
4-Carrier Adjacent Channels
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Calibrate
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before
calibration
Comments
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
. . . continued on next page
A-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX-7, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-4, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-5, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-6, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
BBX-10, ANT-4 =
BBX-3, ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-1 1, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-12, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-7, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset =37 dB before
calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before
calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before
calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-13
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX-4, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-5, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-6, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
BBX-10, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-1 1, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-12, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations
1-Carrier
2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-4, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-5, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-6, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
BBX-7, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-10, ANT-4 =
BBX-3, ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-1 1, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-12, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-15
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX-1, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-2, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-3, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-4, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-5, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-6, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
BBX-7, ANT-1 =
BBX-r , ANT-1 =
dB
dB
BBX-8, ANT-2 =
BBX-r , ANT-2 =
dB
dB
BBX-9, ANT-3 =
BBX-r , ANT-3 =
dB
dB
BBX-10, ANT-4 =
BBX-r , ANT-4 =
dB
dB
BBX-1 1, ANT-5 =
BBX-r , ANT-5 =
dB
dB
BBX-12, ANT-6 =
BBX-r , ANT-6 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-16
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-17
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
Alarm Verification
Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK
Parameter
Verify CDI alarm input
operation per Table 3-1.
Specification
Data
BTS Relay #XX Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-18
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
C-CCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
C-CCP Shelf
CSM-1
CSM-2
HSO
CCD-1
CCD-2
AMR-1
AMR-2
MPC-1
MPC-2
Fans 1-3
GLI3-1
GLI3-2
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
BBX-r
MCC-1
MCC-2
MCC-3
MCC-4
MCC-5
MCC-6
MCC-7
MCC-8
MCC-9
MCC-10
CIO
SWITCH
PS-1
PS-2
PS-3
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
A-19
Site Operation Verification
68P09255A57-2
LPAs
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 2A
LPA 2B
LPA 2C
LPA 2D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
LPA 4A
LPA 4B
LPA 4C
LPA 4D
A-20
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
B
Appendix B
ATP Matrix Table
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
B-1
Re-optimization
68P09255A57-2
Re-optimization
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also mandate re-optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
NOTE
Re-optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in the
tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable associated
with it is replaced.
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Table B-1 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumes that all modules are placed OOS-ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
NOTE
Not every procedure required to bring the site back in service is
indicated in Table B-1. It is meant to be used as a guideline
ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar enough with
the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to understand which test
equipment set ups, calibrations, and BTS site preparation will be
required before performing the Table # procedures referenced.
Various passive BTS components (such as the DRDCs, filter; etc.) only
require a TX calibration audit to be performed in lieu of a full path
calibration. If the TX path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path
calibration will need to be repeated. If the RF path calibration fails,
further troubleshooting is warranted.
Whenever any C-CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that
only power to the C-CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the
breaker supplying that shelf.
NOTE
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow paths, it
would be identified by re-running the RX and TX calibration
audit command.
When the CIO is replaced, the C-CCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX boards may need to be removed, then re-installed into their
original slots, and re-downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
B-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Re-optimization
68P09255A57-2
Table 3-41
TX Path Calibration
Table 3-42
Download Offsets to BBX
Table 3-43
TX Path Audit
Table 3-52
RFDS Path Calibration and
Offset Data Download
Table 4-1
Spectral Purity TX Mask
Table 4-1
Waveform Quality (rho)
Table 4-1
Pilot Time Offset
Table 4-1
Code Domain Power /
Noise Floor
Table 4-1
FER Test
Table 3-54/
Table 3-63
 
  
RFDS
RFDS cables
LFR Initialization /
Verification
LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner
Table 3-27
Swithch Card
LPA or LPA Trunking Module
LPAC Cable
GPS &HSO Initialization /
Verification
GLI3
Table 3-26
ETIB or Associated Cables
RGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGD
CCD Card
Enable CSMs
50-pair Punchblock w/RGPS
CSM/GPS
Table 3-23
HSO/HSOX
MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1X
LFR
BBX2/BBX-1X
CIO
MPC / EMPC
RX Cables
Download Code/Data
Description
TX Cables
Table 3-20/
Table 3-21/
Doc
Tbl
DRDC or TRDC
SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)
Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
Alarm Tests
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
B-3
Re-optimization
68P09255A57-2
RFDS
RFDS cables
LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner
Swithch Card
LPA or LPA Trunking Module
LPAC Cable
GLI3
ETIB or Associated Cables
CCD Card
RGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGD
50-pair Punchblock w/RGPS
HSO/HSOX
LFR
CSM/GPS
MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1X
BBX2/BBX-1X
CIO
MPC / EMPC
TX Cables
Description
RX Cables
Doc
Tbl
DRDC or TRDC
SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)
Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
OPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGEND:
D Required
* Perform if determined necessary for addtional fault isolation, repair assurance, or required for site
certification.
** Replace power supply modules one at a time so that power to the C-CCP shelf is not interrupted. If power
to the shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
1.
Perform on all carrier and sector TX paths to the C-CCP cage.
2.
Perform on all carrier and sector RX paths to the C-CCP cage.
3.
Perform on all primary and redundant TX paths of the affected carrier.
4.
Perform on the affected carrier and sector TX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier
and sector TX paths)
5.
Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier
RX paths)
6.
Perform on all RF paths of the affected carrier and sector (RFDS replacement affects all
carriers)
7.
Perform with redundant BBX for at least one sector on one carrier.
8.
Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.
10
B-4
Perform only if RGD/RGPS, LFR antenna, or HSO or LFR expansion was installed
Verify performance by performing testing on one sector of each carrier.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
C
Appendix C
BBX Gain
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
C-1
BBX Gain Set Point
68P09255A57-2
BBX Gain Set Point
Usage & Background
Table C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant
RF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the
table. The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values
have been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier
with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain
is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate
exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output
range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
541
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
533
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
525
43
42
41
40
39
517
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
509
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
501
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
493
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
485
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
477
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
469
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
461
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
453
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
445
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
437
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
429
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
421
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
413
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
405
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
397
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
389
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
dBm
Gain
. . . continued on next page
C-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
BBX Gain Set Point
68P09255A57-2
Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
381
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
374
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
366
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
358
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
350
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
342
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
334
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
35.1
326
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
318
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
310
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
302
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
294
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
286
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
35.8
34.8
33.8
278
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
33.5
270
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
34.3
33.3
262
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
254
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
33.7
32.7
246
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
35.4
34.4
33.4
32.4
238
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
230
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
33.9
32.9
31.9
222
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
35.6
34.6
33.6
32.6
31.6
214
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
31.2
dBm
Gain
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
C-3
BBX Gain Set Point
68P09255A57-2
Notes
C-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Appendix D
CDMA Operating Frequency
Programming
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
D-1
Channel Frequencies
68P09255A57-2
Channel Frequencies
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the
transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for
each BBX2.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
CHANNEL
25
1851.25
1931.25
1863.75
1943.75
1871.25
1951.25
1883.75
1963.75
1896.25
1976.25
1908.75
1988.75
275
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
425
675
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
925
1175
D-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
FW00463
Aug 2002
Channel Frequencies
68P09255A57-2
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies
Table D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
 TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz
 RX = TX - 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 - 50 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
25
0019
50
0032
75
004B
100
0064
125
007D
150
0096
175
00AF
200
00C8
225
00E1
250
00FA
275
0113
300
012C
325
0145
350
015E
375
0177
400
0190
425
01A9
450
01C2
475
01DB
500
01F4
525
020D
550
0226
575
023F
600
0258
625
0271
650
028A
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1931.25
1932.50
1933.75
1935.00
1936.25
1937.50
1938.75
1940.00
1941.25
1942.50
1943.75
1945.00
1946.25
1947.50
1948.75
1950.00
1951.25
1952.50
1953.75
1955.00
1956.25
1957.50
1958.75
1960.00
1961.25
1962.50
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1851.25
1852.50
1853.75
1855.00
1856.25
1857.50
1858.75
1860.00
1861.25
1862.50
1863.75
1865.00
1866.25
1867.50
1868.75
1870.00
1871.25
1872.50
1873.75
1875.00
1876.25
1877.50
1878.75
1880.00
1881.25
1882.50
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
D-3
Channel Frequencies
68P09255A57-2
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1963.75
1965.00
1966.25
1967.50
1968.75
1970.00
1971.25
1972.50
1973.75
1975.00
1976.25
1977.50
1978.75
1980.00
1981.25
1982.50
1983.75
1985.00
1986.25
1987.50
1988.75
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1883.75
1885.00
1886.25
1887.50
1888.75
1890.00
1891.25
1892.50
1893.75
1895.00
1896.25
1897.50
1898.75
1900.00
1901.25
1902.50
1903.75
1905.00
1906.25
1807.50
1908.75
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
D-4
893.970
848.970
799
777
CDMA NON-WIRELINE (A) BAND
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
739
846.480
846.510
891.480
891.510
694
689
666
667
844.980
845.010
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ËË
ÉÉ
ËË
716
717
889.980
890.010
OVERALL NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDS
644
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
356
834.990
835.020
879.990
880.020
311
333
334
870.000
870.030
825.000
825.030
1023
CHANNEL
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
1013
RX FREQ
(MHz)
824.040
TX FREQ
(MHz)
869.040
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
991
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
675
02A3
700
02BC
725
02D5
750
02EE
775
0307
800
0320
825
0339
850
0352
875
036B
900
0384
925
039D
950
03B6
975
03CF
1000
03E8
1025
0401
1050
041A
1075
0433
1100
044C
1125
0465
1150
047E
1175
0497
FW00402
Aug 2002
Channel Frequencies
68P09255A57-2
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies
Table D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
 Channels 1-777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
 Channels 1013-1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# - 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 - 1023) = 869.76 MHz
 RX = TX - 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 -45 = 832.86 MHz
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
0001
870.0300
825.0300
25
0019
870.7500
825.7500
50
0032
871.5000
826.5000
75
004B
872.2500
827.2500
100
0064
873.0000
828.0000
125
007D
873.7500
828.7500
150
0096
874.5000
829.5000
175
00AF
875.2500
830.2500
200
00C8
876.0000
831.0000
225
00E1
876.7500
831.7500
250
00FA
877.5000
832.5000
275
0113
878.2500
833.2500
300
012C
879.0000
834.0000
325
0145
879.7500
834.7500
350
015E
880.5000
835.5000
375
0177
881.2500
836.2500
400
0190
882.0000
837.0000
425
01A9
882.7500
837.7500
450
01C2
883.5000
838.5000
475
01DB
884.2500
839.2500
500
01F4
885.0000
840.0000
525
020D
885.7500
840.7500
550
0226
886.5000
Aug 2002
841.5000
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
D-5
Channel Frequencies
68P09255A57-2
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
575
023F
887.2500
842.2500
600
0258
888.0000
843.0000
625
0271
888.7500
843.7500
650
028A
889.5000
844.5000
675
02A3
890.2500
845.2500
700
02BC
891.0000
846.0000
725
02D5
891.7500
846.7500
750
02EE
892.5000
847.5000
775
0307
893.2500
848.2500
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013
03F5
869.7000
824.7000
NOTE
1023
D-6
03FF
870.0000
825.0000
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Appendix E
PN Offset
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
E-1
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
PN Offset
Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the
corresponding I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table E-1.
Usage
There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important to
determine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTS
functionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file
FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with
“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for the
processing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of
mobile meeting IS-97 specifications.
Observe the following guidelines:
 If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), the
FineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 table
MUST be used.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
 If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdj
has been set for the 13 chip table.
NOTE
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL or
HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary,
convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimal before comparing
them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.
- If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values from
the 13 chip delay table.
- If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offset
problem, (any mobile meeting the IS-97 specification), use the 14
chip delay table.
NOTE
E-2
If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrong
FineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur. This
will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared” over several
Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh code that it was
assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidence of smearing is
usually identified by Walsh channels not at correct levels or
present when not selected in the Code Domain Power Test.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17523
32292
4700
14406
14899
17025
14745
2783
5832
12407
31295
7581
18523
29920
25184
26282
30623
15540
23026
20019
4050
1557
30262
18000
20056
12143
17437
17438
5102
9302
17154
5198
4606
24804
17180
10507
10157
23850
31425
4075
10030
16984
14225
26519
27775
30100
7922
14199
17637
23081
5099
23459
32589
17398
26333
4011
2256
18651
1094
21202
13841
31767
18890
30999
22420
20168
12354
11187
11834
10395
28035
27399
22087
2077
13758
11778
3543
7184
2362
25840
12177
10402
1917
17708
10630
6812
14350
10999
25003
2652
19898
2010
25936
28531
11952
31947
25589
11345
28198
13947
8462
9595
4473
7E24
125C
3846
3A33
4281
3999
0ADF
16C8
3077
7A3F
1D9D
485B
74E0
6260
66AA
779F
3CB4
59F2
4E33
0FD2
0615
7636
4650
4E58
2F6F
441D
441E
13EE
2456
4302
144E
11FE
60E4
431C
290B
27AD
5D2A
7AC1
0FEB
272E
4258
3791
6797
6C7F
7594
1EF2
3777
44E5
5A29
13EB
5BA3
7F4D
43F6
66DD
0FAB
08D0
48DB
0446
52D2
3611
7C17
49CA
7917
5794
4EC8
3042
2BB3
2E3A
289B
6D83
6B07
5647
081D
35BE
2E02
0DD7
1C10
093A
64F0
2F91
28A2
077D
452C
2986
1A9C
380E
2AF7
61AB
0A5C
4DBA
07DA
6550
6F73
2EB0
7CCB
63F5
2C51
6E26
367B
210E
257B
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29673
16146
2350
7203
19657
28816
19740
21695
2916
18923
27855
24350
30205
14960
12592
13141
27167
7770
11513
30409
2025
21210
15131
9000
10028
18023
29662
8719
2551
4651
8577
2599
2303
12402
8590
17749
16902
11925
27824
22053
5015
8492
18968
25115
26607
15050
3961
19051
29602
31940
22565
25581
29082
8699
32082
18921
1128
27217
547
10601
21812
28727
9445
29367
11210
10084
6177
23525
5917
23153
30973
31679
25887
18994
6879
5889
18647
3592
1181
12920
23028
5201
19842
8854
5315
3406
7175
23367
32489
1326
9949
1005
12968
31109
5976
28761
32710
22548
14099
21761
4231
23681
73E9
3F12
092E
1C23
4CC9
7090
4D1C
54BF
0B64
49EB
6CCF
5F1E
75FD
3A70
3130
3355
6A1F
1E5A
2CF9
76C9
07E9
52DA
3B1B
2328
272C
4667
73DE
220F
09F7
122B
2181
0A27
08FF
3072
218E
4555
4206
2E95
6CB0
5625
1397
212C
4A18
621B
67EF
3ACA
0F79
4A6B
73A2
7CC4
5825
63ED
719A
21FB
7D52
49E9
0468
6A51
0223
2969
5534
7037
24E5
72B7
2BCA
2764
1821
5BE5
171D
5A71
78FD
7BBF
651F
4A32
1ADF
1701
48D7
0E08
049D
3278
59F4
1451
4D82
2296
14C3
0D4E
1C07
5B47
7EE9
052E
26DD
03ED
32A8
7985
1758
7059
7FC6
5814
3713
5501
1087
5C81
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
4096
9167
22417
966
14189
29150
18245
1716
11915
20981
24694
11865
6385
27896
25240
30877
30618
26373
314
17518
21927
2245
18105
8792
21440
15493
26677
11299
12081
23833
20281
10676
16981
31964
26913
14080
23842
27197
22933
30220
12443
19854
14842
15006
702
21373
23874
3468
31323
29266
16554
4096
1571
7484
6319
2447
24441
27351
23613
29008
5643
28085
18200
21138
21937
25222
109
6028
22034
15069
4671
30434
11615
19838
14713
241
24083
7621
19144
1047
26152
22402
21255
30179
7408
115
1591
1006
32263
1332
12636
4099
386
29231
25711
10913
8132
20844
13150
18184
19066
29963
1000
23CF
5791
03C6
376D
71DE
4745
06B4
2E8B
51F5
6076
2E59
18F1
6CF8
6298
789D
779A
6705
013A
446E
55A7
08C5
46B9
2258
53C0
3C85
6835
2C23
2F31
5D19
4F39
29B4
4255
7CDC
6921
3700
5D22
6A3D
5995
760C
309B
4D8E
39FA
3A9E
02BE
537D
5D42
0D8C
7A5B
7252
40AA
1000
0623
1D3C
18AF
098F
5F79
6AD7
5C3D
7150
160B
6DB5
4718
5292
55B1
6286
006D
178C
5612
3ADD
123F
76E2
2D5F
4D7E
3979
00F1
5E13
1DC5
4AC8
0417
6628
5782
5307
75E3
1CF0
0073
0637
03EE
7E07
0534
315C
1003
0182
722F
646F
2AA1
1FC4
516C
335E
4708
4A7A
750B
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
E-3
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
32743
7114
7699
19339
28212
29587
19715
14901
20160
22249
26582
7153
15127
15274
23149
16340
27052
13519
10620
15978
27966
12479
1536
3199
4549
17888
13117
7506
27626
31109
29755
26711
20397
18608
7391
23168
23466
15932
25798
28134
28024
6335
21508
26338
17186
22462
3908
25390
27891
9620
4670
14672
29415
20610
6479
10957
18426
22726
5247
29953
5796
16829
4528
5415
10294
17046
7846
10762
13814
16854
795
9774
24291
3172
2229
21283
16905
7062
7532
25575
14244
28053
30408
5094
16222
7159
174
25530
2320
23113
23985
2604
1826
30853
15699
2589
25000
18163
12555
8670
7FE7
1BCA
1E13
4B8B
6E34
7393
4D03
3A35
4EC0
56E9
67D6
1BF1
3B17
3BAA
5A6D
3FD4
69AC
34CF
297C
3E6A
6D3E
30BF
0600
0C7F
11C5
45E0
333D
1D52
6BEA
7985
743B
6857
4FAD
48B0
1CDF
5A80
5BAA
3E3C
64C6
6DE6
6D78
18BF
5404
66E2
4322
57BE
0F44
632E
6CF3
2594
123E
3950
72E7
5082
194F
2ACD
47FA
58C6
147F
7501
16A4
41BD
11B0
1527
2836
4296
1EA6
2A0A
35F6
41D6
031B
262E
5EE3
0C64
08B5
5323
4209
1B96
1D6C
63E7
37A4
6D95
76C8
13E6
3F5E
1BF7
00AE
63BA
0910
5A49
5DB1
0A2C
0722
7885
3D53
0A1D
61A8
46F3
310B
21DE
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
28195
3557
24281
29717
14106
26649
30545
19658
10080
31396
13291
23592
19547
7637
31974
8170
13526
19383
5310
7989
13983
18831
768
22511
22834
8944
18510
3753
13813
27922
27597
26107
30214
9304
24511
11584
11733
7966
12899
14067
14012
23951
10754
13169
8593
11231
1954
12695
26537
4810
2335
7336
30543
10305
17051
23386
9213
11363
17411
29884
2898
28386
2264
17583
5147
8523
3923
5381
6907
8427
20401
4887
24909
1586
19046
26541
28472
3531
3766
32719
7122
30966
15204
2547
8111
17351
87
12765
1160
25368
24804
1302
913
29310
20629
19250
12500
27973
22201
4335
6E23
0DE5
5ED9
7415
371A
6819
7751
4CCA
2760
7AA4
33EB
5C28
4C5B
1DD5
7CE6
1FEA
34D6
4BB7
14BE
1F35
369F
498F
0300
57EF
5932
22F0
484E
0EA9
35F5
6D12
6BCD
65FB
7606
2458
5FBF
2D40
2DD5
1F1E
3263
36F3
36BC
5D8F
2A02
3371
2191
2BDF
07A2
3197
67A9
12CA
091F
1CA8
774F
2841
429B
5B5A
23FD
2C63
4403
74BC
0B52
6EE2
08D8
44AF
141B
214B
0F53
1505
1AFB
20EB
4FB1
1317
614D
0632
4A66
67AD
6F38
0DCB
0EB6
7FCF
1BD2
78F6
3B64
09F3
1FAF
43C7
0057
31DD
0488
6318
60E4
0516
0391
727E
5095
4B32
30D4
6D45
56B9
10EF
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
22575
31456
8148
19043
25438
10938
2311
7392
30714
180
8948
16432
9622
7524
1443
1810
6941
3238
8141
10408
18826
22705
3879
21359
30853
18078
15910
20989
28810
30759
18899
7739
6279
9968
8571
4143
19637
11867
7374
10423
9984
7445
4133
22646
15466
2164
16380
15008
31755
31636
6605
29417
22993
27657
5468
8821
20773
4920
5756
28088
740
23397
19492
26451
30666
15088
26131
15969
24101
12762
19997
22971
12560
31213
18780
16353
12055
30396
24388
1555
13316
31073
6187
21644
9289
4624
467
18133
1532
1457
9197
13451
25785
4087
31190
8383
12995
27438
9297
1676
582F
7AE0
1FD4
4A63
635E
2ABA
0907
1CE0
77FA
00B4
22F4
4030
2596
1D64
05A3
0712
1B1D
0CA6
1FCD
28A8
498A
58B1
0F27
536F
7885
469E
3E26
51FD
708A
7827
49D3
1E3B
1887
26F0
217B
102F
4CB5
2E5B
1CCE
28B7
2700
1D15
1025
5876
3C6A
0874
3FFC
3AA0
7C0B
7B94
19CD
72E9
59D1
6C09
155C
2275
5125
1338
167C
6DB8
02E4
5B65
4C24
6753
77CA
3AF0
6613
3E61
5E25
31DA
4E1D
59BB
3110
79ED
495C
3FE1
2F17
76BC
5F44
0613
3404
7961
182B
548C
2449
1210
01D3
46D5
05FC
05B1
23ED
348B
64B9
0FF7
79D6
20BF
32C3
6B2E
2451
068C
. . . continued on next page
E-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6491
16876
17034
32405
27417
8382
5624
1424
13034
15682
27101
8521
30232
6429
27116
4238
5128
14846
13024
10625
31724
13811
24915
1213
2290
31551
12088
7722
27312
23130
594
25804
31013
32585
3077
17231
31554
8764
15375
13428
17658
13475
22095
24805
4307
23292
1377
28654
6350
16770
1290
4407
1163
12215
7253
8978
25547
3130
31406
6222
20340
25094
23380
10926
22821
31634
4403
689
27045
27557
16307
22338
27550
22096
23136
12199
1213
936
6272
32446
13555
8789
24821
21068
31891
5321
551
12115
4902
1991
14404
17982
19566
2970
23055
15158
29094
653
19155
23588
195B
41EC
428A
7E95
6B19
20BE
15F8
0590
32EA
3D42
69DD
2149
7618
191D
69EC
108E
1408
39FE
32E0
2981
7BEC
35F3
6153
04BD
08F2
7B3F
2F38
1E2A
6AB0
5A5A
0252
64CC
7925
7F49
0C05
434F
7B42
223C
3C0F
3474
44FA
34A3
564F
60E5
10D3
5AFC
0561
6FEE
18CE
4182
050A
1137
048B
2FB7
1C55
2312
63CB
0C3A
7AAE
184E
4F74
6206
5B54
2AAE
5925
7B92
1133
02B1
69A5
6BA5
3FB3
5742
6B9E
5650
5A60
2FA7
04BD
03A8
1880
7EBE
34F3
2255
60F5
524C
7C93
14C9
0227
2F53
1326
07C7
3844
463E
4C6E
0B9A
5A0F
3B36
71A6
028D
4AD3
5C24
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23933
8438
8517
28314
25692
4191
2812
712
6517
7841
25918
16756
15116
23902
13558
2119
2564
7423
6512
17680
15862
19241
24953
21390
1145
27727
6044
3861
13656
11565
297
12902
27970
28276
22482
28791
15777
4382
20439
6714
8829
19329
31479
24994
22969
11646
21344
14327
3175
8385
645
18087
19577
23015
16406
4489
32729
1565
15703
3111
10170
12547
11690
5463
25262
15817
18085
20324
31470
31726
20965
11169
13775
11048
11568
23023
19554
468
3136
16223
21573
24342
32326
10534
28789
17496
20271
22933
2451
19935
7202
8991
9783
1485
25403
7579
14547
20346
27477
11794
5D7D
20F6
2145
6E9A
645C
105F
0AFC
02C8
1975
1EA1
653E
4174
3B0C
5D5E
34F6
0847
0A04
1CFF
1970
4510
3DF6
4B29
6179
538E
0479
6C4F
179C
0F15
3558
2D2D
0129
3266
6D42
6E74
57D2
7077
3DA1
111E
4FD7
1A3A
227D
4B81
7AF7
61A2
59B9
2D7E
5360
37F7
0C67
20C1
0285
46A7
4C79
59E7
4016
1189
7FD9
061D
3D57
0C27
27BA
3103
2DAA
1557
62AE
3DC9
46A5
4F64
7AEE
7BEE
51E5
2BA1
35CF
2B28
2D30
59EF
4C62
01D4
0C40
3F5F
5445
5F16
7E46
2926
7075
4458
4F2F
5995
0993
4DDF
1C22
231F
2637
05CD
633B
1D9B
38D3
4F7A
6B55
2E12
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
25414
7102
20516
19495
17182
11572
25570
6322
8009
26708
6237
32520
31627
3532
24090
20262
18238
2033
25566
25144
29679
5064
27623
13000
31373
13096
26395
15487
29245
26729
12568
24665
8923
19634
29141
73
26482
6397
29818
8153
302
28136
29125
8625
26671
6424
12893
18502
7765
25483
12596
19975
20026
8958
19143
17142
19670
30191
5822
22076
606
9741
9116
12705
17502
18952
15502
17819
4370
31955
30569
7350
26356
32189
1601
19537
25667
4415
2303
16362
28620
6736
2777
24331
9042
107
4779
13065
30421
20210
5651
31017
30719
23104
7799
17865
26951
25073
32381
16581
6346
1BBE
5024
4C27
431E
2D34
63E2
18B2
1F49
6854
185D
7F08
7B8B
0DCC
5E1A
4F26
473E
07F1
63DE
6238
73EF
13C8
6BE7
32C8
7A8D
3328
671B
3C7F
723D
6869
3118
6059
22DB
4CB2
71D5
0049
6772
18FD
747A
1FD9
012E
6DE8
71C5
21B1
682F
1918
325D
4846
1E55
638B
3134
4E07
4E3A
22FE
4AC7
42F6
4CD6
75EF
16BE
563C
025E
260D
239C
31A1
445E
4A08
3C8E
459B
1112
7CD3
7769
1CB6
66F4
7DBD
0641
4C51
6443
113F
08FF
3FEA
6FCC
1A50
0AD9
5F0B
2352
006B
12AB
3309
76D5
4EF2
1613
7929
77FF
5A40
1E77
45C9
6947
61F1
7E7D
40C5
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
E-5
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14726
25685
21356
12149
28966
22898
1713
30010
2365
27179
29740
5665
23671
1680
25861
25712
19245
26887
30897
11496
1278
31555
29171
20472
5816
30270
22188
6182
32333
14046
15873
19843
29367
13352
22977
31691
10637
25454
18610
6368
7887
7730
23476
889
21141
20520
21669
15967
21639
31120
10878
31060
30875
11496
24545
9586
20984
30389
7298
18934
23137
24597
23301
7764
14518
21634
11546
26454
15938
9050
3103
758
16528
20375
10208
17698
8405
28634
1951
20344
26696
3355
11975
31942
9737
9638
30643
13230
22185
2055
8767
15852
16125
6074
31245
15880
20371
8666
816
22309
3986
6455
536C
2F75
7126
5972
06B1
753A
093D
6A2B
742C
1621
5C77
0690
6505
6470
4B2D
6907
78B1
2CE8
04FE
7B43
71F3
4FF8
16B8
763E
56AC
1826
7E4D
36DE
3E01
4D83
72B7
3428
59C1
7BCB
298D
636E
48B2
18E0
1ECF
1E32
5BB4
0379
5295
5028
54A5
3E5F
5487
7990
2A7E
7954
789B
2CE8
5FE1
2572
51F8
76B5
1C82
49F6
5A61
6015
5B05
1E54
38B6
5482
2D1A
6756
3E42
235A
0C1F
02F6
4090
4F97
27E0
4522
20D5
6FDA
079F
4F78
6848
0D1B
2EC7
7CC6
2609
25A6
77B3
33AE
56A9
0807
223F
3DEC
3EFD
17BA
7A0D
3E08
4F93
21DA
0330
5725
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
7363
25594
10678
18026
14483
11449
21128
15005
21838
25797
14870
23232
32747
840
25426
12856
29766
25939
28040
5748
639
27761
26921
10236
2908
15135
11094
3091
28406
7023
20176
30481
26763
6676
32048
27701
17686
12727
9305
3184
24247
3865
11738
20588
30874
10260
31618
20223
31635
15560
5439
15530
29297
5748
25036
4793
10492
30054
3649
9467
25356
32310
25534
3882
7259
10817
5773
13227
7969
4525
18483
379
8264
27127
5104
8849
24150
14317
19955
10172
13348
18609
22879
15971
23864
4819
30181
6615
25960
19007
24355
7926
20802
3037
29498
7940
27125
4333
408
26030
1CC3
63FA
29B6
466A
3893
2CB9
5288
3A9D
554E
64C5
3A16
5AC0
7FEB
0348
6352
3238
7446
6553
6D88
1674
027F
6C71
6929
27FC
0B5C
3B1F
2B56
0C13
6EF6
1B6F
4ED0
7711
688B
1A14
7D30
6C35
4516
31B7
2459
0C70
5EB7
0F19
2DDA
506C
789A
2814
7B82
4EFF
7B93
3CC8
153F
3CAA
7271
1674
61CC
12B9
28FC
7566
0E41
24FB
630C
7E36
63BE
0F2A
1C5B
2A41
168D
33AB
1F21
11AD
4833
017B
2048
69F7
13F0
2291
5E56
37ED
4DF3
27BC
3424
48B1
595F
3E63
5D38
12D3
75E5
19D7
6568
4A3F
5F23
1EF6
5142
0BDD
733A
1F04
69F5
10ED
0198
65AE
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
15408
6414
8164
10347
29369
10389
24783
18400
22135
4625
22346
2545
7786
20209
26414
1478
15122
24603
677
13705
13273
14879
6643
23138
28838
9045
10792
25666
11546
15535
16134
8360
14401
26045
24070
30300
13602
32679
16267
9063
19487
12778
27309
12527
953
15958
6068
23577
32156
32709
32087
97
7618
93
16052
14300
11129
6602
14460
25458
15869
27047
26808
7354
27834
11250
552
27058
14808
9642
32253
26081
21184
11748
32676
2425
19455
19889
18177
2492
15086
30632
27549
6911
9937
2467
25831
32236
12987
11714
19283
11542
27928
26637
10035
10748
24429
29701
14997
32235
3C30
190E
1FE4
286B
72B9
2895
60CF
47E0
5677
1211
574A
09F1
1E6A
4EF1
672E
05C6
3B12
601B
02A5
3589
33D9
3A1F
19F3
5A62
70A6
2355
2A28
6442
2D1A
3CAF
3F06
20A8
3841
65BD
5E06
765C
3522
7FA7
3F8B
2367
4C1F
31EA
6AAD
30EF
03B9
3E56
17B4
5C19
7D9C
7FC5
7D57
0061
1DC2
005D
3EB4
37DC
2B79
19CA
387C
6372
3DFD
69A7
68B8
1CBA
6CBA
2BF2
0228
69B2
39D8
25AA
7DFD
65E1
52C0
2DE4
7FA4
0979
4BFF
4DB1
4701
09BC
3AEE
77A8
6B9D
1AFF
26D1
09A3
64E7
7DEC
32BB
2DC2
4B53
2D16
6D18
680D
2733
29FC
5F6D
7405
3A95
7DEB
. . . continued on next page
E-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
3698
16322
17429
21730
17808
30068
12737
28241
20371
13829
13366
25732
19864
5187
23219
28242
6243
445
21346
13256
18472
25945
31051
1093
5829
31546
29833
18146
24813
47
3202
21571
7469
25297
8175
28519
4991
7907
17728
14415
30976
26376
19063
19160
3800
8307
12918
19642
24873
22071
29563
13078
10460
17590
20277
19988
6781
32501
6024
20520
31951
26063
27203
6614
10970
5511
17119
16064
31614
4660
13881
16819
6371
24673
6055
10009
5957
11597
22155
15050
16450
27899
2016
17153
15849
30581
3600
4097
671
20774
24471
27341
19388
25278
9505
26143
13359
2154
13747
27646
0E72
3FC2
4415
54E2
4590
7574
31C1
6E51
4F93
3605
3436
6484
4D98
1443
5AB3
6E52
1863
01BD
5362
33C8
4828
6559
794B
0445
16C5
7B3A
7489
46E2
60ED
002F
0C82
5443
1D2D
62D1
1FEF
6F67
137F
1EE3
4540
384F
7900
6708
4A77
4AD8
0ED8
2073
3276
4CBA
6129
5637
737B
3316
28DC
44B6
4F35
4E14
1A7D
7EF5
1788
5028
7CCF
65CF
6A43
19D6
2ADA
1587
42DF
3EC0
7B7E
1234
3639
41B3
18E3
6061
17A7
2719
1745
2D4D
568B
3ACA
4042
6CFB
07E0
4301
3DE9
7775
0E10
1001
029F
5126
5F97
6ACD
4BBC
62BE
2521
661F
342F
086A
35B3
6BFE
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
1849
8161
29658
10865
8904
15034
18736
26360
30233
19154
6683
12866
9932
23537
31881
14121
24033
20750
10673
6628
9236
25468
28021
21490
23218
15773
27540
9073
24998
20935
1601
31729
24390
24760
24103
26211
22639
24225
8864
19959
15488
13188
29931
9580
1900
16873
6459
9821
24900
31435
30593
6539
5230
8795
27046
9994
17154
28998
3012
10260
28763
31963
31517
3307
5485
17663
28499
8032
15807
2330
21792
28389
16973
32268
17903
23984
17822
22682
25977
7525
8225
30785
1008
28604
20680
30086
1800
17980
20339
10387
25079
31578
9694
12639
23724
32051
21547
1077
21733
13823
0739
1FE1
73DA
2A71
22C8
3ABA
4930
66F8
7619
4AD2
1A1B
3242
26CC
5BF1
7C89
3729
5DE1
510E
29B1
19E4
2414
637C
6D75
53F2
5AB2
3D9D
6B94
2371
61A6
51C7
0641
7BF1
5F46
60B8
5E27
6663
586F
5EA1
22A0
4DF7
3C80
3384
74EB
256C
076C
41E9
193B
265D
6144
7ACB
7781
198B
146E
225B
69A6
270A
4302
7146
0BC4
2814
705B
7CDB
7B1D
0CEB
156D
44FF
6F53
1F60
3DBF
091A
5520
6EE5
424D
7E0C
45EF
5DB0
459E
589A
6579
1D65
2021
7841
03F0
6FBC
50C8
7586
0708
463C
4F73
2893
61F7
7B5A
25DE
315F
5CAC
7D33
542B
0435
54E5
35FF
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23557
17638
3545
9299
6323
19590
7075
14993
19916
6532
17317
16562
26923
9155
20243
32391
20190
27564
20869
9791
714
7498
23278
8358
9468
23731
25133
2470
17501
24671
11930
9154
7388
3440
27666
22888
13194
26710
7266
15175
15891
26692
14757
28757
31342
19435
2437
20573
18781
18948
30766
5985
6823
20973
10197
9618
22705
5234
12541
8019
22568
5221
25216
1354
29335
6682
26128
29390
8852
6110
11847
10239
6955
10897
14076
12450
8954
19709
1252
15142
26958
8759
12696
11936
25635
17231
22298
7330
30758
6933
2810
8820
7831
19584
2944
19854
10456
17036
2343
14820
5C05
44E6
0DD9
2453
18B3
4C86
1BA3
3A91
4DCC
1984
43A5
40B2
692B
23C3
4F13
7E87
4EDE
6BAC
5185
263F
02CA
1D4A
5AEE
20A6
24FC
5CB3
622D
09A6
445D
605F
2E9A
23C2
1CDC
0D70
6C12
5968
338A
6856
1C62
3B47
3E13
6844
39A5
7055
7A6E
4BEB
0985
505D
495D
4A04
782E
1761
1AA7
51ED
27D5
2592
58B1
1472
30FD
1F53
5828
1465
6280
054A
7297
1A1A
6610
72CE
2294
17DE
2E47
27FF
1B2B
2A91
36FC
30A2
22FA
4CFD
04E4
3B26
694E
2237
3198
2EA0
6423
434F
571A
1CA2
7826
1B15
0AFA
2274
1E97
4C80
0B80
4D8E
28D8
428C
0927
39E4
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
E-7
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13904
27198
3685
16820
22479
6850
15434
19332
8518
14698
21476
30475
23984
1912
26735
15705
3881
20434
16779
31413
16860
8322
28530
26934
18806
20216
9245
8271
18684
8220
6837
9613
31632
27448
12417
30901
9366
12225
21458
6466
8999
26718
3230
27961
28465
6791
17338
11832
11407
15553
1056
1413
3311
4951
749
6307
961
2358
28350
31198
11467
8862
6327
7443
28574
25093
6139
22047
32545
7112
28535
10378
15065
5125
12528
23215
20959
3568
26453
29421
24555
10779
25260
16084
26028
29852
14978
12182
25143
15838
5336
21885
20561
30097
21877
23589
26060
9964
25959
3294
3650
6A3E
0E65
41B4
57CF
1AC2
3C4A
4B84
2146
396A
53E4
770B
5DB0
0778
686F
3D59
0F29
4FD2
418B
7AB5
41DC
2082
6F72
6936
4976
4EF8
241D
204F
48FC
201C
1AB5
258D
7B90
6B38
3081
78B5
2496
2FC1
53D2
1942
2327
685E
0C9E
6D39
6F31
1A87
43BA
2E38
2C8F
3CC1
0420
0585
0CEF
1357
02ED
18A3
03C1
0936
6EBE
79DE
2CCB
229E
18B7
1D13
6F9E
6205
17FB
561F
7F21
1BC8
6F77
288A
3AD9
1405
30F0
5AAF
51DF
0DF0
6755
72ED
5FEB
2A1B
62AC
3ED4
65AC
749C
3A82
2F96
6237
3DDE
14D8
557D
5051
7591
5575
5C25
65CC
26EC
6567
0CDE
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6952
13599
22242
8410
31287
3425
7717
9666
4259
7349
10738
27221
11992
956
26087
20348
22084
10217
28949
27786
8430
4161
14265
13467
9403
10108
17374
16887
9342
4110
23690
17174
15816
13724
18832
28042
4683
17968
10729
3233
16451
13359
1615
26444
26184
23699
8669
5916
18327
20400
528
19710
18507
18327
20298
17005
20444
1179
14175
15599
22617
4431
16999
16565
14287
32574
17857
25907
29100
3556
31111
5189
21328
17470
6264
25451
26323
1784
32150
30538
25033
23345
12630
8042
13014
14926
7489
6091
32551
7919
2668
25730
26132
29940
25734
24622
13030
4982
31887
1647
1B28
351F
56E2
20DA
7A37
0D61
1E25
25C2
10A3
1CB5
29F2
6A55
2ED8
03BC
65E7
4F7C
5644
27E9
7115
6C8A
20EE
1041
37B9
349B
24BB
277C
43DE
41F7
247E
100E
5C8A
4316
3DC8
359C
4990
6D8A
124B
4630
29E9
0CA1
4043
342F
064F
674C
6648
5C93
21DD
171C
4797
4FB0
0210
4CFE
484B
4797
4F4A
426D
4FDC
049B
375F
3CEF
5859
114F
4267
40B5
37CF
7F3E
45C1
6533
71AC
0DE4
7987
1445
5350
443E
1878
636B
66D3
06F8
7D96
774A
61C9
5B31
3156
1F6A
32D6
3A4E
1D41
17CB
7F27
1EEF
0A6C
6482
6614
74F4
6486
602E
32E6
1376
7C8F
066F
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23393
5619
17052
21292
2868
19538
24294
22895
27652
29905
21415
1210
22396
26552
24829
8663
991
21926
23306
13646
148
24836
24202
9820
12939
2364
14820
2011
13549
28339
25759
11116
31448
27936
3578
12371
12721
10264
25344
13246
544
9914
4601
16234
24475
26318
6224
13381
30013
22195
1756
19068
28716
31958
16097
1308
3320
16682
6388
12828
3518
3494
6458
10717
8463
27337
19846
9388
21201
31422
166
28622
6477
10704
25843
25406
21523
8569
9590
22466
12455
27506
21847
28392
1969
30715
23674
22629
12857
30182
21880
6617
27707
16249
24754
31609
22689
3226
4167
25624
5B61
15F3
429C
532C
0B34
4C52
5EE6
596F
6C04
74D1
53A7
04BA
577C
67B8
60FD
21D7
03DF
55A6
5B0A
354E
0094
6104
5E8A
265C
328B
093C
39E4
07DB
34ED
6EB3
649F
2B6C
7AD8
6D20
0DFA
3053
31B1
2818
6300
33BE
0220
26BA
11F9
3F6A
5F9B
66CE
1850
3445
753D
56B3
06DC
4A7C
702C
7CD6
3EE1
051C
0CF8
412A
18F4
321C
0DBE
0DA6
193A
29DD
210F
6AC9
4D86
24AC
52D1
7ABE
00A6
6FCE
194D
29D0
64F3
633E
5413
2179
2576
57C2
30A7
6B72
5557
6EE8
07B1
77FB
5C7A
5865
3239
75E6
5578
19D9
6C3B
3F79
60B2
7B79
58A1
0C9A
1047
6418
. . . continued on next page
E-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17418
14952
52
27254
15064
10942
377
14303
24427
26629
20011
16086
24374
9969
29364
25560
28281
7327
32449
26334
14760
15128
29912
4244
8499
9362
10175
30957
12755
19350
1153
29304
6041
21668
28048
10096
23388
15542
24013
2684
19018
25501
4489
31011
29448
25461
11846
30331
10588
32154
30173
15515
5371
10242
28052
14714
19550
8866
15297
10898
31315
19475
1278
11431
31392
4381
14898
23959
16091
9037
24162
6383
27183
16872
9072
12966
28886
25118
20424
6729
20983
12372
13948
27547
8152
17354
17835
14378
7453
26317
5955
10346
13200
30402
7311
3082
21398
31104
24272
27123
440A
3A68
0034
6A76
3AD8
2ABE
0179
37DF
5F6B
6805
4E2B
3ED6
5F36
26F1
72B4
63D8
6E79
1C9F
7EC1
66DE
39A8
3B18
74D8
1094
2133
2492
27BF
78ED
31D3
4B96
0481
7278
1799
54A4
6D90
2770
5B5C
3CB6
5DCD
0A7C
4A4A
639D
1189
7923
7308
6375
2E46
767B
295C
7D9A
75DD
3C9B
14FB
2802
6D94
397A
4C5E
22A2
3BC1
2A92
7A53
4C13
04FE
2CA7
7AA0
111D
3A32
5D97
3EDB
234D
5E62
18EF
6A2F
41E8
2370
32A6
70D6
621E
4FC8
1A49
51F7
3054
367C
6B9B
1FD8
43CA
45AB
382A
1D1D
66CD
1743
286A
3390
76C2
1C8F
0C0A
5396
7980
5ED0
69F3
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
8709
7476
26
13627
7532
5471
20844
19007
32357
26066
30405
8043
12187
17064
14682
12780
26348
24479
28336
13167
7380
7564
14956
2122
16713
4681
16911
28070
18745
9675
21392
14652
23068
10834
14024
5048
11694
7771
32566
1342
9509
24606
22804
27969
14724
24682
5923
27373
5294
16077
29906
20593
17473
5121
14026
7357
9775
4433
21468
5449
29461
26677
639
22639
15696
18098
7449
24823
20817
24474
12081
16971
31531
8436
4536
6483
14443
12559
10212
17176
26311
6186
6974
31729
4076
8677
27881
7189
16562
32090
17821
5173
6600
15201
16507
1541
10699
15552
12136
31429
2205
1D34
001A
353B
1D6C
155F
516C
4A3F
7E65
65D2
76C5
1F6B
2F9B
42A8
395A
31EC
66EC
5F9F
6EB0
336F
1CD4
1D8C
3A6C
084A
4149
1249
420F
6DA6
4939
25CB
5390
393C
5A1C
2A52
36C8
13B8
2DAE
1E5B
7F36
053E
2525
601E
5914
6D41
3984
606A
1723
6AED
14AE
3ECD
74D2
5071
4441
1401
36CA
1CBD
262F
1151
53DC
1549
7315
6835
027F
586F
3D50
46B2
1D19
60F7
5151
5F9A
2F31
424B
7B2B
20F4
11B8
1953
386B
310F
27E4
4318
66C7
182A
1B3E
7BF1
0FEC
21E5
6CE9
1C15
40B2
7D5A
459D
1435
19C8
3B61
407B
0605
29CB
3CC0
2F68
7AC5
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
30380
15337
10716
13592
2412
15453
13810
12956
30538
10814
18939
19767
20547
29720
31831
26287
11310
25724
21423
5190
258
13978
4670
23496
23986
839
11296
30913
27297
10349
32504
18405
3526
19161
23831
21380
4282
32382
806
6238
10488
19507
27288
2390
19094
13860
9225
2505
27806
2408
10924
23096
22683
10955
17117
15837
22647
10700
30293
5579
11057
30238
14000
22860
27172
307
20380
26427
10702
30024
14018
4297
13938
25288
27294
31835
8228
12745
6746
1456
27743
27443
31045
12225
21482
14678
30656
13721
21831
30208
9995
3248
12030
5688
2082
23143
25906
15902
21084
25723
76AC
3BE9
29DC
3518
096C
3C5D
35F2
329C
774A
2A3E
49FB
4D37
5043
7418
7C57
66AF
2C2E
647C
53AF
1446
0102
369A
123E
5BC8
5DB2
0347
2C20
78C1
6AA1
286D
7EF8
47E5
0DC6
4AD9
5D17
5384
10BA
7E7E
0326
185E
28F8
4C33
6A98
0956
4A96
3624
2409
09C9
6C9E
0968
2AAC
5A38
589B
2ACB
42DD
3DDD
5877
29CC
7655
15CB
2B31
761E
36B0
594C
6A24
0133
4F9C
673B
29CE
7548
36C2
10C9
3672
62C8
6A9E
7C5B
2024
31C9
1A5A
05B0
6C5F
6B33
7945
2FC1
53EA
3956
77C0
3599
5547
7600
270B
0CB0
2EFE
1638
0822
5A67
6532
3E1E
525C
647B
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
E-9
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29572
13173
10735
224
12083
22822
2934
27692
10205
7011
22098
2640
4408
102
27632
19646
26967
32008
7873
655
25274
16210
11631
8535
19293
12110
21538
10579
13032
14717
11666
25809
5008
32418
22175
11742
22546
21413
133
4915
8736
1397
18024
15532
26870
5904
24341
13041
23478
1862
5578
25731
10662
11084
31098
16408
6362
2719
14732
22744
1476
8445
21118
22198
22030
10363
25802
2496
31288
24248
14327
23154
13394
1806
17179
10856
25755
15674
7083
29096
3038
16277
25525
20465
28855
32732
20373
9469
26155
6957
12214
21479
31914
32311
11276
20626
423
2679
15537
10818
7384
3375
29EF
00E0
2F33
5926
0B76
6C2C
27DD
1B63
5652
0A50
1138
0066
6BF0
4CBE
6957
7D08
1EC1
028F
62BA
3F52
2D6F
2157
4B5D
2F4E
5422
2953
32E8
397D
2D92
64D1
1390
7EA2
569F
2DDE
5812
53A5
0085
1333
2220
0575
4668
3CAC
68F6
1710
5F15
32F1
5BB6
0746
15CA
6483
29A6
2B4C
797A
4018
18DA
0A9F
398C
58D8
05C4
20FD
527E
56B6
560E
287B
64CA
09C0
7A38
5EB8
37F7
5A72
3452
070E
431B
2A68
649B
3D3A
1BAB
71A8
0BDE
3F95
63B5
4FF1
70B7
7FDC
4F95
24FD
662B
1B2D
2FB6
53E7
7CAA
7E37
2C0C
5092
01A7
0A77
3CB1
2A42
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14786
18538
17703
112
17993
11411
1467
13846
16958
23649
11049
1320
2204
51
13816
9823
25979
16004
24240
20631
12637
8105
18279
16763
29822
6055
10769
17785
6516
19822
5833
25528
2504
16209
31391
5871
11273
30722
20882
22601
4368
21354
9012
7766
13435
2952
32346
18600
11739
931
2789
31869
5331
5542
15549
8204
3181
19315
7366
11372
738
24130
10559
11099
11015
23041
12901
1248
15644
12124
21959
11577
6697
903
28593
5428
31857
7837
17385
14548
1519
20982
32742
27076
30311
16366
27126
23618
32041
17322
6107
26575
15957
28967
5638
10313
20207
19207
20580
5409
39C2
486A
4527
0070
4649
2C93
05BB
3616
423E
5C61
2B29
0528
089C
0033
35F8
265F
657B
3E84
5EB0
5097
315D
1FA9
4767
417B
747E
17A7
2A11
4579
1974
4D6E
16C9
63B8
09C8
3F51
7A9F
16EF
2C09
7802
5192
5849
1110
536A
2334
1E56
347B
0B88
7E5A
48A8
2DDB
03A3
0AE5
7C7D
14D3
15A6
3CBD
200C
0C6D
4B73
1CC6
2C6C
02E2
5E42
293F
2B5B
2B07
5A01
3265
04E0
3D1C
2F5C
55C7
2D39
1A29
0387
6FB1
1534
7C71
1E9D
43E9
38D4
05EF
51F6
7FE6
69C4
7667
3FEE
69F6
5C42
7D29
43AA
17DB
67CF
3E55
7127
1606
2849
4EEF
4B07
5064
1521
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13347
7885
6669
8187
18145
14109
14231
27606
783
6301
5067
15383
1392
7641
25700
25259
19813
20933
638
16318
6878
1328
14744
22800
25919
4795
18683
32658
1586
27208
17517
599
16253
8685
29972
22128
19871
19405
17972
8599
10142
26834
23710
27280
6570
7400
26374
22218
29654
13043
13427
31084
24023
23931
15836
6085
30324
27561
13821
269
28663
29619
2043
6962
29119
22947
9612
18698
16782
29735
2136
8086
10553
11900
19996
5641
28328
25617
26986
5597
14078
13247
499
30469
17544
28510
23196
13384
4239
20725
6466
28465
19981
16723
4522
678
15320
29116
5388
22845
3423
1ECD
1A0D
1FFB
46E1
371D
3797
6BD6
030F
189D
13CB
3C17
0570
1DD9
6464
62AB
4D65
51C5
027E
3FBE
1ADE
0530
3998
5910
653F
12BB
48FB
7F92
0632
6A48
446D
0257
3F7D
21ED
7514
5670
4D9F
4BCD
4634
2197
279E
68D2
5C9E
6A90
19AA
1CE8
6706
56CA
73D6
32F3
3473
796C
5DD7
5D7B
3DDC
17C5
7674
6BA9
35FD
010D
6FF7
73B3
07FB
1B32
71BF
59A3
258C
490A
418E
7427
0858
1F96
2939
2E7C
4E1C
1609
6EA8
6411
696A
15DD
36FE
33BF
01F3
7705
4488
6F5E
5A9C
3448
108F
50F5
1942
6F31
4E0D
4153
11AA
02A6
3BD8
71BC
150C
593D
. . . continued on next page
E-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
5850
5552
12589
23008
27636
17600
17000
21913
30320
28240
7260
17906
5882
22080
12183
23082
17435
18527
31902
18783
20027
7982
20587
10004
13459
13383
28930
4860
13108
24161
20067
2667
13372
28743
24489
249
19960
29682
31101
27148
26706
5148
4216
5762
245
21882
3763
206
28798
32402
23074
20250
14629
29175
13943
11072
29492
5719
7347
12156
25623
27725
28870
31478
28530
24834
9075
32265
3175
17434
12178
25613
31692
25384
18908
25816
4661
31115
7691
1311
16471
15771
16112
21062
29690
10141
19014
22141
11852
26404
30663
32524
28644
10228
23536
18045
25441
27066
13740
13815
16DA
15B0
312D
59E0
6BF4
44C0
4268
5599
7670
6E50
1C5C
45F2
16FA
5640
2F97
5A2A
441B
485F
7C9E
495F
4E3B
1F2E
506B
2714
3493
3447
7102
12FC
3334
5E61
4E63
0A6B
343C
7047
5FA9
00F9
4DF8
73F2
797D
6A0C
6852
141C
1078
1682
00F5
557A
0EB3
00CE
707E
7E92
5A22
4F1A
3925
71F7
3677
2B40
7334
1657
1CB3
2F7C
6417
6C4D
70C6
7AF6
6F72
6102
2373
7E09
0C67
441A
2F92
640D
7BCC
6328
49DC
64D8
1235
798B
1E0B
051F
4057
3D9B
3EF0
5246
73FA
279D
4A46
567D
2E4C
6724
77C7
7F0C
6FE4
27F4
5BF0
467D
6361
69BA
35AC
35F7
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
2925
2776
18758
11504
13818
8800
8500
31516
15160
14120
3630
8953
2941
11040
17947
11541
29661
30207
15951
30079
30413
3991
31205
5002
19353
19443
14465
2430
6554
32480
30433
21733
6686
27123
32260
20908
9980
14841
28014
13574
13353
2574
2108
2881
20906
10941
22153
103
14399
16201
11537
10125
21166
30407
21767
5536
14746
17687
16485
6078
31799
30746
14435
15739
14265
12417
24453
28984
18447
8717
6089
31802
15846
12692
9454
12908
18214
29433
16697
19635
28183
20721
8056
10531
14845
24050
9507
25858
5926
13202
30175
16262
14322
5114
11768
27906
32652
13533
6870
21703
0B6D
0AD8
4946
2CF0
35FA
2260
2134
7B1C
3B38
3728
0E2E
22F9
0B7D
2B20
461B
2D15
73DD
75FF
3E4F
757F
76CD
0F97
79E5
138A
4B99
4BF3
3881
097E
199A
7EE0
76E1
54E5
1A1E
69F3
7E04
51AC
26FC
39F9
6D6E
3506
3429
0A0E
083C
0B41
51AA
2ABD
5689
0067
383F
3F49
2D11
278D
52AE
76C7
5507
15A0
399A
4517
4065
17BE
7C37
781A
3863
3D7B
37B9
3081
5F85
7138
480F
220D
17C9
7C3A
3DE6
3194
24EE
326C
4726
72F9
4139
4CB3
6E17
50F1
1F78
2923
39FD
5DF2
2523
6502
1726
3392
75DF
3F86
37F2
13FA
2DF8
6D02
7F8C
34DD
1AD6
54C7
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
24457
17161
21314
28728
22162
26259
22180
2266
10291
26620
19650
14236
11482
25289
12011
13892
17336
10759
26816
31065
8578
24023
16199
22310
30402
16613
13084
3437
1703
22659
26896
1735
16178
19166
665
20227
24447
16771
27209
6050
29088
7601
4905
5915
6169
21303
28096
8905
26997
15047
28430
8660
2659
8803
19690
22169
8511
17393
11336
13576
22820
13344
20107
8013
18835
16793
9818
4673
13609
10054
10988
14744
17930
25452
11334
15451
11362
2993
11012
5806
20180
8932
23878
20760
32764
32325
25993
3268
25180
12149
10193
9128
7843
25474
11356
11226
16268
14491
8366
26009
5F89
4309
5342
7038
5692
6693
56A4
08DA
2833
67FC
4CC2
379C
2CDA
62C9
2EEB
3644
43B8
2A07
68C0
7959
2182
5DD7
3F47
5726
76C2
40E5
331C
0D6D
06A7
5883
6910
06C7
3F32
4ADE
0299
4F03
5F7F
4183
6A49
17A2
71A0
1DB1
1329
171B
1819
5337
6DC0
22C9
6975
3AC7
6F0E
21D4
0A63
2263
4CEA
5699
213F
43F1
2C48
3508
5924
3420
4E8B
1F4D
4993
4199
265A
1241
3529
2746
2AEC
3998
460A
636C
2C46
3C5B
2C62
0BB1
2B04
16AE
4ED4
22E4
5D46
5118
7FFC
7E45
6589
0CC4
625C
2F75
27D1
23A8
1EA3
6382
2C5C
2BDA
3F8C
389B
20AE
6599
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
E-11
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13463
15417
23101
14957
23429
12990
12421
28875
4009
1872
15203
30109
24001
4862
14091
6702
3067
28643
21379
20276
25337
19683
10147
16791
17359
13248
22740
13095
10345
30342
27866
9559
8808
12744
11618
27162
17899
29745
31892
23964
23562
2964
18208
15028
21901
24566
18994
13608
27492
11706
3684
23715
15314
32469
9816
4444
5664
7358
27264
28128
30168
29971
3409
16910
20739
10191
12819
19295
10072
15191
27748
720
29799
27640
263
24734
16615
20378
25116
19669
14656
27151
28728
25092
22601
2471
25309
15358
17739
12643
32730
19122
16870
10787
18400
20295
1937
17963
7438
12938
3497
3C39
5A3D
3A6D
5B85
32BE
3085
70CB
0FA9
0750
3B63
759D
5DC1
12FE
370B
1A2E
0BFB
6FE3
5383
4F34
62F9
4CE3
27A3
4197
43CF
33C0
58D4
3327
2869
7686
6CDA
2557
2268
31C8
2D62
6A1A
45EB
7431
7C94
5D9C
5C0A
0B94
4720
3AB4
558D
5FF6
4A32
3528
6B64
2DBA
0E64
5CA3
3BD2
7ED5
2658
115C
1620
1CBE
6A80
6DE0
75D8
7513
0D51
420E
5103
27CF
3213
4B5F
2758
3B57
6C64
02D0
7467
6BF8
0107
609E
40E7
4F9A
621C
4CD5
3940
6A0F
7038
6204
5849
09A7
62DD
3BFE
454B
3163
7FDA
4AB2
41E6
2A23
47E0
4F47
0791
462B
1D0E
328A
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19355
20428
31950
19686
31762
6495
18834
27061
22020
936
19553
27422
32560
2431
19029
3351
21549
26145
30737
10138
24748
30625
16897
28955
28727
6624
11370
18499
17892
15171
13933
17275
4404
6372
5809
13581
29477
27592
15946
11982
11781
1482
9104
7514
31510
12283
9497
6804
13746
5853
1842
24685
7657
29014
4908
2222
2832
3679
13632
14064
15084
29877
18580
8455
26301
24027
22325
27539
5036
21399
13874
360
29711
13820
20159
12367
28239
10189
12558
26710
7328
31547
14364
12546
25112
19183
32594
7679
27801
22157
16365
9561
8435
23341
9200
27039
19956
27945
3719
6469
4B9B
4FCC
7CCE
4CE6
7C12
195F
4992
69B5
5604
03A8
4C61
6B1E
7F30
097F
4A55
0D17
542D
6621
7811
279A
60AC
77A1
4201
711B
7037
19E0
2C6A
4843
45E4
3B43
366D
437B
1134
18E4
16B1
350D
7325
6BC8
3E4A
2ECE
2E05
05CA
2390
1D5A
7B16
2FFB
2519
1A94
35B2
16DD
0732
606D
1DE9
7156
132C
08AE
0B10
0E5F
3540
36F0
3AEC
74B5
4894
2107
66BD
5DDB
5735
6B93
13AC
5397
3632
0168
740F
35FC
4EBF
304F
6E4F
27CD
310E
6856
1CA0
7B3B
381C
3102
6218
4AEF
7F52
1DFF
6C99
568D
3FED
2559
20F3
5B2D
23F0
699F
4DF4
6D29
0E87
1945
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17460
17629
10461
21618
11498
193
16140
13419
10864
28935
18765
27644
21564
5142
1211
1203
5199
16945
4883
25040
7119
17826
4931
25705
10726
17363
2746
10952
19313
29756
14297
21290
1909
8994
13295
21590
26468
13636
5207
29493
18992
12567
12075
26658
21077
15595
4921
14051
5956
21202
5164
17126
21566
21845
28149
9400
19459
7190
3101
491
25497
29807
26508
4442
4871
31141
9864
12589
5417
8549
14288
8503
20357
15381
18065
24678
23858
7610
18097
20918
7238
30549
16320
20853
26736
10327
24404
7931
5310
554
27311
6865
7762
15761
12697
24850
15259
24243
30508
13982
4434
44DD
28DD
5472
2CEA
00C1
3F0C
346B
2A70
7107
494D
6BFC
543C
1416
04BB
04B3
144F
4231
1313
61D0
1BCF
45A2
1343
6469
29E6
43D3
0ABA
2AC8
4B71
743C
37D9
532A
0775
2322
33EF
5456
6764
3544
1457
7335
4A30
3117
2F2B
6822
5255
3CEB
1339
36E3
1744
52D2
142C
42E6
543E
5555
6DF5
24B8
4C03
1C16
0C1D
01EB
6399
746F
678C
115A
1307
79A5
2688
312D
1529
2165
37D0
2137
4F85
3C15
4691
6066
5D32
1DBA
46B1
51B6
1C46
7755
3FC0
5175
6870
2857
5F54
1EFB
14BE
022A
6AAF
1AD1
1E52
3D91
3199
6112
3B9B
5EB3
772C
369E
. . . continued on next page
E-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
14-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14301
23380
11338
2995
23390
14473
6530
20452
12226
1058
12026
19272
29989
8526
18139
3247
28919
7292
20740
27994
2224
6827
37DD
5B54
2C4A
0BB3
5B5E
3889
1982
4FE4
2FC2
0422
2EFA
4B48
7525
214E
46DB
0CAF
70F7
1C7C
5104
6D5A
08B0
1AAB
13-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19006
11690
5669
21513
11695
19860
3265
10226
6113
529
6013
9636
29870
4263
27985
18539
30279
3646
10370
13997
1112
17257
4A3E
2DAA
1625
5409
2DAF
4D94
0CC1
27F2
17E1
0211
177D
25A4
74AE
10A7
6D51
486B
7647
0E3E
2882
36AD
0458
4369
0-Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
11239
30038
30222
13476
2497
31842
24342
25857
27662
24594
16790
25039
24086
21581
21346
28187
23231
18743
11594
7198
105
4534
2BE7
7556
760E
34A4
09C1
7C62
5F16
6501
6C0E
6012
4196
61CF
5E16
544D
5362
6E1B
5ABF
4937
2D4A
1C1E
0069
11B6
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
E-13
PN Offset
68P09255A57-2
Notes
E-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Appendix F
Test Preparation
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-1
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Test Equipment Setup
Purpose
This appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCS
interface, the HP8935 and the Advantest R3465. The Cybertest test set
doesn’t require any setup.
HP8921A Test Equipment Connections
Table F-1 depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A test equipment as
configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment is controlled
by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects each piece
of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to Table F-4).
If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece
of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses have been
set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to the test
equipment.
Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium
From Test Set:
8921A
CW RF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
IQ RF IN
DET OUT
CONTROL I/O
10 MHZ OUT
HPIB INTERFACE
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
CW RF IN
114.3 MHZ IF IN
IQ RF OUT
AUX DSP IN
CONTROL I/O
SYNTH REF IN
10 MHZ OUT
F-2
83236A PCS
HPIB INTERFACE
REF IN
Connector Type
SMC-female - SMC-female
SMC-female - SMC-female
SMC-female - SMC-female
SMC-female - SMC-female
45-pin custom BUS
BNC-male - BNC-male
HPIB cable
BNC-male - BNC-male
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
REF IN
HP-IB
FW00368
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-3
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Figure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium
From Test Set:
8921A
CW RF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
IQ RF IN
DET OUT
CONTROL I/O
10 MHZ OUT
HPIB INTERFACE
10 MHZ INPUT
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
83236A PCS
CW RF IN
114.3 MHZ IF IN
IQ RF OUT
AUX DSP IN
CONTROL I/O
REF IN
HPIB INTERFACE
10 MHZ OUT
Connector Type
SMC-female - SMC-female
SMC-female - SMC-female
SMC-female - SMC-female
SMC-female - SMC-female
45-pin custom BUS
BNC-male - BNC-male
HPIB cable
BNC-male - BNC-male
F-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium
10 MHZ WITH
RUBIDIUM STANDARD
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
REF IN
HP-IB
FW00369
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-5
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
HP8921A System Connectivity Test
Follow the steps in Table F-3 to verify that the connections between the
PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables are intact. The
software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.
NOTE
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system controllers,
from the system before running the connectivity software.
Table F-3: System Connectivity
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
- Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select Card.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through the
connectivity setup.
Do the following when the test is complete,
 position cursor on STOP TEST and select it
 OR press the [K5] pushbutton.
To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Follow the steps in Table F-4 to set the HP8921A GPIB address.
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address
Step
Action
If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.
Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.
 HP8921A HP-IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configure
on the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).
 HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:
- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1
F-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Before the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Step
Action
Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.
Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
Pretest Setup for HP8935
Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935
Step
Action
Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.
Press the Push to Select knob.
Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
Advantest R3465 Connection
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest test
equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects
each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to
Table F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and
any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses
have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to
the test equipment.
Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-7
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
10 MHZ OUT
AC POWER
SERIAL I/O
R3465
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00370
GPIB
CONNECTOR
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T-CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)
F-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
FROM 10 MHZ
RUBIDIUM REFERENCE
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
10 MHZ OUT
AC POWER
SERIAL I/O
R3465/3463
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00371
GPIB
CONNECTOR
Aug 2002
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
TO T-CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)
F-9
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup
Follow the steps in Table F-7 to set the GPIB address and clock for the
Advantest R3465 equipment.
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup
Step
Action
Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:
 Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
 Push the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)
- Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.
- If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob to
enter)
Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set if
required)
Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
 Push the Date/Time CRT menu key
 If required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernier
knob to enter)
 Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465
Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465
Step
Action
Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.
Press the RESET button.
F-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection
To provide proper operation during testing when both units are required,
the 10 MHz reference signal from the E4406A transmitter test set must
be provided to the E4432B signal generator. Connect a BNC (M)-BNC
(M) cable from the E4406A 10 MHz OUT (SWITCHED) connector to
the E4432B 10MHz IN connector as shown in Figure F-5.
Figure F-5: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections
E4432B
10 MHz IN
TO GPIB BOX
E4406A
10 MHz OUT
(SWITCHED)
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-11
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using HP PCS Interface (HP83236)
Table F-9 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using
the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
NOTE
Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica
This calibration method must be executed with great care. Some
losses are measured close to the minimum limit of the power
meter sensor (-30 dBm).
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.
Press the Preset pushbutton.
Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.
If using HP 83236A:
Set channel number=:
- Position cursor at Channel
Number and select it.
- Enter the chan# using the numeric
keypad; press [Enter] and the
screen will go blank.
- When the screen reappears, the
chan# will be displayed on the
channel number line.
Set RF Generator level:
- Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.
- Enter -10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.
- When the screen reappears, the value -10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.
. . . continued on next page
F-12
If using HP 83236B:
Set channel frequency:
- Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.
- Select User Defined Frequency.
- Go Back to Previous Menu.
- Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and
enter actual RX frequency.
- Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and
enter actual TX frequency.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:
- Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it
- Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
- Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:
Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:
- Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
- Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
- Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 - 1910
MHz).
- Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.
12
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
13
Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
14
On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
15
Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.
16
Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude
by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
17
Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter
before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
18
Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each
component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record the
calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.
 Example:
(A) Test Cable(s)
(B) 20 dB Attenuator =
(B) Directional Coupler =
-1.4 dB
-20.1 dB
-29.8 dB
19
After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test
setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
 Example:
Total test setup loss = -1.4 -29.8 -20.1 = -51.3 dB.
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
21
Select Continue (K2).
22
Select RF Generator Level and set to -119 dBm.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-13
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
23
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
24
Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields
not indicated remain at default):
 Verify the GPIB (HP-IB) address:
under To Screen, select More
select IO CONFIG
Set HP-IB Adrs to 18
set Mode to Talk&Lstn
 Verify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)
- Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.
- Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq
25
Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
F-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Figure F-6: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
(B)
20 dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
150 W
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
Aug 2002
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
FW00292
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-15
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465
NOTE
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performed
at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
- This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display
Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key
Select the Setup CRT menu key
Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
Select the return CRT menu key
Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys
Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10
Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13
Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
15
Record the power meter reading ________________________
. . . continued on next page
F-16
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
16
Action
Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re-zer o the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17
Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one-at-a-time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-7, “Setups
A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.
Example:
(A) 1st Test Cable
= -0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable
= -1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator
= -20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler
= -29.8 dB
18
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
19
Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example:
Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area
21
Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency
22
Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23
Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-17
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Figure F-7: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
(A) & (B)
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
100 W
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
F-18
FW00320
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps outlined in Table F-11 to enter information unique to
the power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-8 as
required.
NOTE
Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica
This procedure must be done in conjunction with the automated
calibration to enter power sensor specific calibration values.
Figure F-8: Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
TO POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.
POWER REFERENCE IS
ENABLED USING THE SHIFT
KEYS
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
CONNECT POWER
SENSOR WITH POWER
METER TURNED OFF
FW00308
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis-calibration.
- Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.
- Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.
NOTE
The calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed to
warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Aug 2002
Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:
- To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET] .
- Use the [ ] or [ ] button to select HP-IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].
- Use the [ ] or [ ] button to select HP-IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].
- To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].
. . . continued on next page
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-19
Test Equipment Setup
68P09255A57-2
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:
- Press [SHIFT] then [ ] to select SENSOR.
- Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [ ] or [ ] button to
select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].
NOTE
Be sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOT
displayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then [ ] to turn it off.
Press [ZERO] . Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.
Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.
To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:
- Press [SHIFT] then [ ].
- Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.
Perform the following to set the REF CF %:
- Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO] ) for CAL.
- Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)
NOTE
If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.
Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:
- Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.
- On the sensor’s decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at 2 GHz. Enter
the sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and
0.10 is normal.)
10
To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:
- Press [SHIFT] then [ ].
- Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output.
F-20
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter
68P09255A57-2
Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps in Table F-12 to enter information unique to the power
sensor.
Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
NOTE
Allow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before
performing the calibration procedure.
 Make sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.
 Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
 Set the POWER pushbutton to ON.
Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:
Press MENU. Use the
Use the
arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.
Use the
Press
arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.
arrow keys to set MODE to 8541C.
and use the
arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.
Press ENTER.
 Connect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.
 Press ZERO.
 Wait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during this
process.
 Disconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.
Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO
CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
WITH POWER METER
TURNED OFF
FRONT View
AC POWER
GPIB CONNECTION
REAR View
FW00564
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
F-21
Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter
68P09255A57-2
Notes
F-22
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Appendix G
Power Calibration
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-1
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Calibrating Output Power
Power Calibration
This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple
carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows
you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and
recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.
Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a
maintenance window.
This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4-to-1 combiners.
The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one
time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be
calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain
in service and vice versa.
Equipment Warm up
NOTE
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test
equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the
overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been
allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) has
been replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
could introduce measurement errors, causing incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
Power Delta Calibration Introduction
The In-service calibration procedure has several differences from a
normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum
analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are
broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power
during In-service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A
spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given
frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less
accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for
the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum
analyzer.
G-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration
Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during
In-Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has
been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
NOTE
This procedure requires two HP8921As.
Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure G-1).
Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:
- Measure mode to CDMA Generator
- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
- CW RF Path to IQ
- Output Port to Dupl
- Data Source to Random
- Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring
HP8921A RF-IN port (see Figure G-2).
Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.
Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:
- Measure mode to CDMA Anl
- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
- Input Attenuation to 0 dB
- Input port to RF-IN
- Gain to Auto
- Analyzer Direction to Fwd
Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.
10
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result
B ________________________.
11
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-3
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
12
Action
Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:
Delta = A - B
Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.
Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B
HP 8921A
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX
OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00801
Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A
Measurement HP8921A
Source HP8921A
DUPLEX
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00802
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table G-2 to perform the Advantest 3465 Power
Delta Calibration procedure.
G-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
On the Advantest R3465:
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.
Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.
On the HP 437 Power Meter:
10
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
11
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor,
refer to Figure G-3.
12
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.
13
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.
15
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum
Analyzer INPUT Port, refer to Figure G-4.
16
Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.
17
Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
18
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
19
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
20
Press the dB/div CRT menu key.
21
Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.
22
Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.
23
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
24
Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-5
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
25
Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.
26
Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
27
Press the TRACE CRT menu key.
28
Press the AVG A CRT menu key.
29
Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.
30
Press the return CRT menu key.
31
Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.
32
Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.
33
Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.
34
Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.
35
Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.
36
Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.
37
Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.
38
Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
39
Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.
40
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A - B
Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.
Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B
Advantest
R3561L
RF OUT
Power
Sensor
HP437B
Short RF Cable
SENSOR
FW00803
G-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465
RF OUT
R3561L
Short RF Cable
R3465
INPUT
FW00804
HP8935 Power Delta Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table G-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure G-5).
Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:
- Measure mode to CDMA Gen
- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
- CW RF Path to IQ
- Output Port to Dupl
- Data Source to Random
- Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF-IN/OUT port
(see Figure G-6).
Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.
Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:
- Measure mode to CDMA Anl
- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
- Input Attenuation to 0 dB
- Input port to RF-IN
- Gain to Auto
- Anl Dir to Fwd
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-7
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.
10
Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.
11
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result
B ________________________.
12
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.
13
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A - B
Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.
Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00805
Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
G-8
FW00806
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration
The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator test
equipment combination can be used for CDMA 2000 as well as
IS-95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is performed on
the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the reference signal
used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offset value has been
calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.
Follow the procedure in Table G-4 to perform the Agilent E4406A
Power Delta Calibration procedure.
Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the
“Test Set Calibration” section of the Optimization/Calibration chapter in the SC 4812ET
Optimization/ATP manual.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter power
sensor (see Figure G-7).
Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:
- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured.
- Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the numeric keypad.
- Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured; for
example MHz.
- Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero).
- Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm.
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.
- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.
- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the RF
INPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure G-8).
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-9
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Do not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the following
steps.
Set the E4406A as follows:
- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured
- Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne
- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum
- Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency
- Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric keypad
- Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured; for example, MHz
- Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten
- Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB
- Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile
- Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB
- Using the soft keys, select Base
- Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB
- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power
On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.
- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
10
Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as
result B____________________.
11
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.
- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
12
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Agilent measurement.
Delta = A - B
Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.
G-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Figure G-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437
AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A
HP437B
SENSOR
RF OUTPUT
Power
Sensor
Short RF Cable
FW00858
Figure G-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A
AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A
RF OUTPUT
Short RF
Cable
RF INPUT
FW00859
In-Service Calibration
NOTE
This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time. The
system has no safe-guards to stop you from doing something
that will take the BTS out of service. If possible, perform this
procedure during a maintenance window.
Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise the
entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.
At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion hardware
when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.
The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to
performing this procedure.
Prerequisites
 Expansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the
CDF file has been generated.
 The expansion devices have been inserted into the C-CCP cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.
 The site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have
been loaded onto the LMF.
 The LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-11
Calibrating Output Power
NOTE
68P09255A57-2
Do not download code or data to any cards other than those you
are working on. Downloading code or data to other cards will
take the site OUT OF SERVICE.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers
on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, the
site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
The BTS-#.cdf, CBSC-#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS must
have come from the CBSC.
 Test equipment has been configured per Figure G-9 or Figure G-10.
 An RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is
already known, must be in line to perform the in-service calibration.
 Test equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.
 A short RF cable and two BNC-N adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.
 The Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table G-1,
Table G-2, or Table G-3).
G-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Figure G-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
DUPLEX OUT
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ÁÁ
Á
Á
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
HP-IB
TO GPIB
BOX
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
RX
(FOR 800 MHZ)
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
EXT
REF
IN
DUPLEX
OUT
ANTENNA
TX
TEST
CABLE
RF IN/OUT
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF IN/OUT
RX
TEST
CABLE
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00759
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-13
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Figure G-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
RX
TEST
CABLE
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
ANTENNA
INPUT 50
OHM
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
MOD TIME BASE IN
(EXT REF IN)
RF OUT
50 OHM
NOTE:
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
EXT
REF
IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
BNC
“T”
EXT TRIG IN
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
RF OUT 50
OHMS
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
RF
INPUT
50
OHMS
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
BNC
“T”
GPIB
CABLE
TX
CABLE
RX
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
RF
OUT 50
OHMS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
19.6608
MHZ
CLOCK
FREQ
MONITOR
RF
INPUT 50
OHMS
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
GPIB ADRS
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
BNC
“T”
G-14
TO 10 MHZ IN
(EXT REF IN)
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF. FW00759
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Follow the procedure in Table G-5 to perform the In-Service
Calibration.
Table G-5: In-Service Calibration
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Set up the LMF for In-Service Calibration:
- Start the LMF by double-clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.
- Click Tools>Options from the menu bar at the login screen.
- Check the applicable spectrum analyzer check box and the signal generator check box on the Test
Equipment tab.
Ensure that the GPIB address is 18 for the CDMA analyzer and 1 for the signal generator.
- Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.
- Click the Apply button.
- Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.
- Check the In-Service Calibration check box.
- Click the Apply button.
- Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.
Login to the target BTS:
- Select the target BTS icon.
- Click the Login button at the login screen.
Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:
- Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.
- Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up
window.
- Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.
- Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.
NOTE
- The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.
- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.
Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.
- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.
- Add the value computed in Table G-1, Table G-2, or Table G-3 to the TX Cable Loss.
NOTE
Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics
and do not represent actual readings:
- Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm
- Example: 5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm
- Example: -5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = -5.10 dBm
- Example: -5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = -5.94 dBm
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-15
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Table G-5: In-Service Calibration
Step
Action
Input the Coupler Loss for the TX and RX tests:
- Click Util>Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX from the menu bar at the main window.
- Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of BTS installation.
- Click the Save button.
- Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
- To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>Coupler Loss>TX or RX.
Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.
! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in-service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE
and can result in dropped calls.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the
numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
NOTE
Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 9, 10, and 11.
Download code and data to the target devices:
- Click Tools>Update NextLoad>CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.
- Select the BTS(s) you need, check the appropriate code version in the pop up window, and click
the Save button to close.
- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.
- Click Device>Download>Code/Data to start downloading code.
- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.
- Click Device>Download>Data to start downloading data.
. . . continued on next page
G-16
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Table G-5: In-Service Calibration
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Perform the In-service Calibration procedure on OOS devices only.
Select the desired test:
- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.
- Click Tests>[desired test] from the menu bar at the main window.
- Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.
- Leave the Verify BLO check box checked.
- From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
- Click the OK button to start calibration.
- Follow the on-screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the
directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.
NOTE
 Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
 Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requires
an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for all
the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using
this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gain
for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):
- Click the Save Result button on the result screen.
The window closes automatically.
10
Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:
- Click BTS>Logout to close the BTS connection.
- Close the LMF window.
11
Restore the new “bts-*.cal” file to the CBSC.
12
Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
G-17
Calibrating Output Power
68P09255A57-2
Notes
G-18
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Appendix H
Cable Interconnection
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-1
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling
This appendix provides the identification and location of the cables
connecting the components which make up the SC 4812ET RF cabinet.
The number of cables and components incorporated in the RF cabinet
will vary depending on the the manner in which the cabinet is equipped.
For example, a 3 sector, 2 carrier system will require less components
and less cables than a 6 sector 2 carrier system.
Refer to Table H-1 and Figure H-1 through Figure H-19 for the cable
you wish to research.
NOTE
In some cases cables with the same number are used to connect
two different signalling paths. These cables are designated A &
B and the point they connect to and from is also designated A &
B. Ensure the correct cable (A or B) is connected to the correct
designation (A or B) connector or plug.
Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES
DRDC, Combiner, Trunking Backplane Cables
CABLE #
FROM
NOTE’s
TO
3064795A05
TX CIO
Figure H-6
Trunking BP
3064735A10
TX Trunking BP
Figure H-5
Combiner Connector Pnl
3064735A07
TX Combiner
See Figure H-1, Figure H-11,
Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and
Figure H-14
DRDC
3064735A11
TX Combiner
(See Above)
DRDC
3064735A12
TX Combiner
(See Above)
DRDC
3064795A07
TX CIO
Figure H-11
Trunking BP
3086435H01
TX Combiner QDS
PkZ Adptr
3086435H02
TX Combiner QDS
PkZ Adptr
3086435H03
TX Combiner QDS
PkZ Adptr
3086168H01
Power LPA PDA
Figure H-5
Trunk BP
C-CCP Cables
CABLE #
FROM
NOTE’s
TO
3064809A01
Power CCCP/PDA
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP Backplane
3064899A04
LAN I/O A in
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP LAN I/O A In
C-CCP Cables (cont)
CABLE #
FROM
NOTEs
TO
3064899A04
LAN I/O B in
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP LAN I/O B In
3086033H03
GPS Surge Arrestor
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCPBackplane
3064899A04
LAN I/O B in
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP LAN I/O B In
. . . continued on next page
H-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES
3064899A03
C-CCP LAN I/O A Out
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
LAN I/O A Out
3064899A03
C-CCP LAN I/O B Out
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
LAN I/O B Out
3064899A07
Sync CSM
See Figure H-1
I/O
3086000H02
Site I/O C-CCP
See Figure H-9
J2 on ETIB
3086001H02
A SPAN I/O BlkHd
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP/A SPAN I/O
3086001H02
B SPAN I/O BlkHd
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP/B SPAN I/O
3086086H02
Alarm C-CCP
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9
J1 on ETIB
3086366H02
HSO/LFR
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP HSO/LFR
4886044H01
LBD
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5
C-CCP Backplane
Span I/O Board Cables
CABLE #
FROM
NOTEs
TO
3086601H01
SPAN I/O Pblock
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10
CSU
3086601H02
SPAN CSU
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10
A & B SPAN I/O BRD
3086001H02
SPAN CSU
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10
A & B SPAN Connector on
C-CCP Backplane
RFDS Cables
CABLE #
FROM
NOTE’s
TO
3064238A17
RFDS/ASU-1
Figure H-16 & Figure H-17
DRDC
3064238A18
RFDS/ASU-2
Figure H-16 & Figure H-17
DRDC
3064238A19
RFDS/ASU-1
Figure H-16 & Figure H-17
DRDC
3064238A20
RFDS/ASU-2
Figure H-16 & Figure H-17
DRDC
ETIB/LPAC Cables
CABLE #
FROM
NOTE’s
TO
3064794A03
LPAC
See Figure H-8
C-CCP Bkpln
3064794A05
ETIB
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9
RFDS
3086433H04
RGPS I/O
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9
ETIB (15 position)
3086169H01
Power, Heat Exchanger,
PDA
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9
ETIB, OPT, HX, EBA
3086500H01
Alm/Ctrl ETIB
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9
HX/LPA
3086505H01
DC Cable (DC Power Dist) See Figure H-1 & Figure H-19
EBA Blower Assembly
3086566H01
LPAC
See Figure H-1 & Figure H-8
1 Cable to each LPA Bk Pln
3086569H01
Door Intrusion Alarm
See Figure H-5 & Figure H-19
Door Switch
3086655H02
LPAC
See Figure H-8, Figure H-5 &
Figure H-19
ETIB
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-3
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations
(See Figure H-8,
Figure H-9), and
Figure H-10)
EBA
RFDS
ETIB
LPAC
SPAN I/O
C-CCP Shelf
(See Figure H-2
and Figure H-5)
(See Figure H-11,
Figure H-12,
Figure H-13, and
Figure H-14)
OPTIONAL AREA
(See Figure H-10)
Combiner
Cage
DRDC
LPA’s
CSU
Modem
DC
Power
Dist.
Punch
Block
(back)
LAN
OUT
IN
DRDC
19 MHz
2 Sec
LAN I/O
Span I/O
to C-CCP
SYS
Sync
Alarm to
ETIB
To
Span I/O (See Figure H-11) LPA Trunking
Backplane
(See Figure H-5
(See Figure H-4,
and Figure H-10)
Figure H-5, Figure H-6
and Figure H-8)
FW00698
H-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
C-CCP Cables and Cable Connectors
The C-CCP Shelf assembly consists of the C-CCP Shelf and the attached
backplane with cables and connectors (see Figure H-2 and Figure H-3).
The C-CCP shelf contains all of the CDMA unique functions within the
SC 4812ET RF frame. The C-CCP shelf contains the following
components:
Broadband Transceiver (BBX) cards
Multi-Channel CDMA (MCC) cards
Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card
Power Supply cards
Group Line Interface (GLI3) cards
Alarm Monitor Reporting (AMR) cards
Clock Synchronization Modules (CSM)
High Stability Oscillator/Low frequency Receiver (HSO/LFR)
Multicoupler Preselector Cards (MPC)
CDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) card
Integrated Frame Modem (IFM) card
Switch card
C-CCP Fan Modules
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-5
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and Connectors
(To J1
connector on
the ETIB)
Cable #
3086086H02
(To SPAN A I/O
connector on
the Bulkhead)
Cable #
3086001H02
ALARMS
(To J2
connector on
the ETIB)
Cable #
3086000H02
(To SPAN B I/O
connector on the
Bulkhead)
Cable #
3086001H02
SITE I/O
SPAN B
SPAN A
Cable #
3086366H02
LAN I/O A Cable #
3064899A04
LAN I/O B Cable #
3064899A04
MPC/EMPC-1
BBX2-6
BBX2-13
BBX2-5
BBX2-4
BBX2-3
BBX2-2
BBX2-1
MCC24-6
MCC24-5
MCC24-4
MCC24-3
MCC24-2
GLI3-1
MCC24-1
AMR-1
PS-3
PS-2
PS-1
19 mm Filter Panel
HSO/LFR
MPC/EMPC-2
Switch Card
BBX2-12
BBX2-1 1
BBX2-10
BBX2-9
BBX2-8
BBX2-7
MCC24-12
MCC24-1 1
MCC24-10
MCC24-9
MCC24-8
MCC24-7
GLI3-2
AMR-2
FILLER
CCD-1
CCD-2
CSM-2
CSM-1
HSO/LFR
CIO
To LAN I/O
connectors on
the Bulkhead
LPAC
C-CCP Shelf
FW00699
Cable #
3064794A03
(To the C-CCP
connector on the
LPAC Module)
H-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-3: C-CCP Backplane
(To J1
connector on
the ETIB)
Cable #
3086086H02
(To SPAN A I/O
connector on
the Bulkhead)
Cable #
3086001H02
(To J2
connector on
the ETIB)
Cable #
3086000H02
(To SPAN B I/O
connector on the
Bulkhead)
Cable #
3086001H02
SYSTEM
LED
Cable #
4886044H01
HSO/LFR
LAN IN A
LAN IN B
CCCP Power
3064809A01
Cable #
3086366H02
Cable #
3064899A04
Cable #
3064899A04
To LAN I/O
connectors on
the Bulkhead
Cable #
3064794A03
(To the C-CCP
connector on the
LPAC Module)
Cable #
LAN OUT A 3064899A03
LAN OUT B Cable #
3064899A03
LPAC
GPS
Cable #
3086033H03
FW00700
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-7
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
RF Cabinet LPA Cables
There can be a maximum of 16 LPAs in an RF cabinet. The connections
shown are for one LPA backplane which controls four LPAs. The
remaining LPAs are connected in the same manner. Refer to Figure H-4,
through Figure H-8 for the cables connected to the LPAs in the 4812ET
RF cabinet.
Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET
EBA
ETIB
RFDS
5 RU RACK
SPACE
SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet
Note:
LPA Component door
not shown for clarity
Unpopulated
LPA Shelf Cover
External Blower
Assembly (EBA)
LPA Module
(4-Each Cage)
FW00173
H-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables
LPA
Backplane
EBA
RFDS
LPA-1
ETIB
TX
OUT1
5 RU RACK SPACE
Cable
3064735A10
(3 each)
TX
IN 1
TX
OUT2
LPA-2
TX
IN2
TX
IN 3
LPA-3
TX
OUT3
SC 4812ET BTS
RF Cabinet
LPA-4
4B
4A
1B
1A
S1
C1
S2
S3
S1
C2
LPA-1
S2
5B
5A
2B
2A
S3
S1
C3
S2
LPA-2
S3
6B
6A
3B
3A
S1
C4
S2
S3
FROM APPROPRIATE
LPA
LPA 1, LPA 2,
LPA 3, LPA 4
LPA-3
LPA-4
BACK
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
FW00708-REF
H-9
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board Cables
LPA
Backplane 1
EBA
RFDS
LPA-1
ETIB
TX
OUT1
5 RU RACK SPACE
TX
IN 1
TX
OUT2
Cable 3064735A10
(3 each)
LPA-2
RED
TX
IN2
ORANGE
YELLOW
TX
IN 3
LPA-3
TX
OUT3
SC 4812ET BTS
RF Cabinet
LPA-4
4B
4A
1B
S1
1A
C1
S2
TO J15 on CIO Board
(See Figure H-7)
Cable 3064795A05
S3
S1
C2
LPA-1
S2
5B
5A
2B
2A
S3
S1
C3
TX
OUT1
S2
TX
IN 1
TX
OUT2
S3
6B
6A
3B
3A
S1
C4
LPA-2
GREEN
VIOLET
TX
IN2
S2
S3
BLUE
TX
IN 3
LPA-3
TX
OUT3
LPA-4
FW00711
LPA
Backplane 2
H-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO Card
SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
ETIB
EBA
RFDS
5 RU RACK
SPACE
RX EXP A
J12
RX EXP B
J13
TX BTS 1-6
J15
BTS 7-12
M/F 1-6
J14
TX
FW00237
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-11
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
LPAC Cabling
The LPAC module provides the communication interface from the ETIB
and C-CCP to the LPA through the trunking backplane. The LPAC
interface board is contained in a protective housing which is mounted on
the RF cabinet frame behind the ETIB module. See Figure H-3,
Figure H-8 and Figure H-9 for connecting cables and connector
locations.
The LPAC is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.
Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers
LPAC INTERFACE
BOARD
FRONT
LPA-1
ALARM RIBBON
CABLE TO ETIB
3086655H02
RIBBON CABLE TO
C-CCP BACKPLANE
3064794A03
TX
OUT1
LPA-2
TX IN
TX
OUT2
TX
IN2
TX IN 3
LPA 1A, 1B 1C, 1D
RIBBON CABLE
3086566H01
LPA-3
TX
OUT3
LPA 2A, 2B 2C, 2D
RIBBON CABLE
3086566H01
LPA-4
LPA 3A, 3B 3C, 3D
RIBBON CABLE
3086566H01
LPA 4A, 4B 4C, 4D
RIBBON CABLE
3086566H01
LPA BACKPLANE
1, 2, 3, & 4
FW00702
Cable # 3086566H01
(4 Connections each Side)
NOTE: The LPAC is Located
Behind the ETIB Module
H-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors
The ETIB module (see Figure H-9) provides the interface for the LPA’s
through the LPAC, punchblock, heat exchanger and alarms to the
C-CCP backplane. The ETIB interface board is contained in a protective
housing which is mounted on the RF cabinet frame.
The ETIB is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.
Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers
Cable #
3064794A05
(See Figure H-16)
Cable #
3086168H01
J6
DC POWER
Cable #
3086655H02
(See Figure H-8)
P7
RFDS
P2
LPAC
P9 ALARMS IN
(From Bulkhead )
Cable #
3064534A08
(See Figure H-1)
J1 To ALARMS OUT
(C-CCP Backplane)
(Reserved)
SITE I/O (C-CCP Backplane)
P8 OPTIONS
RECEPTACLE
DOOR INTRUSION ALARM
Cable #
3086569h01
Cable #
3086000H02
See Figure 2-5
and Figure H-3
J2
J5
LFR/HSO
J4
Cable #
3086433H04
(See Figure H-1)
Cable #
3086500h01
HEAT EXCH
J3
RGD/RGPS
Cable #
3086366H02
See Figure 2-5
and Figure H-3
Aug 2002
Cable #
3086086H02
See Figure 2-5
and Figure H-3
FW00701
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-13
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram
The SPAN I/O card provides the frame interface and secondary surge
protection for the T1 lines. There are two span cards in an RF cabinet.
SPAN I/O A supports spans A, C, and E. SPAN I/O B supports span B,
D, and F. See Figure H-10 for SPAN cables and cable connections.
The SPAN I/O is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.
H-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and Connectors
20 Pair
RGD
Punchblock Board
(RGPS)
SPAN I/O (A & B)
Interface Module
(Located Behind
the LPAC Module,
See Figure H-1)
RGD/RGPS
50 Pair
Punch
Block
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B
4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B
Microwave
(Alarms/
Spans)
RF Expansion Ports
Power Input
+27V
RF
GPS
LAN
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B
IN OUT
Remote
ASU
Power Input
27V Ret
4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B
19 MHz
Spans
Modem
Alams
Antenna’s
2 Sec
GND
Lugs
4812ET Rear Connector Panel
SPAN I/O WIRING DIAGRAM
SPAN I/O A
SPAN I/O B
C-CCP
Backplane
3086001H02
Bulkhead
SPAN I/O A
Bulkhead
SPAN I/O
Connector
3086601H01
CSU
3086601H02
SPAN I/O B
3086001H02
To/From
GLI
To/From
Network
DTE
To/From
GLI
To/From
Network
DATA PORT
DCE
SLOT 2
T1
DDS
SLOT 1
T1 TERMINAL
NETWORK
DATA PORT
T1
DDS
T1 TERMINAL
NETWORK
CONTROL
PORT
GROUP
ADDRESS
SHELF
ADDRESS
CSU Back View
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
FW00703
H-15
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections
The DRDC is a Duplexer, RX Filter, and Directional Coupler which
provides the RF interface at the rear of the cabinet. The connections are
the antenna connection (outside rear), transmit into the DRDC TX filter.
Receive out of DRDC (RX filter), and Directional coupler.
The TRDC is a TX filter/RX filter/Directional Coupler that is the same
as the DRDC except the TRDC has two antenna outputs (TX only and
RX only) The TRDC is not available in the 1.9 GHz band.
See Figure H-11, Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and Figure H-14 for the
cable diagram that fits the configuration of your BTS site.
H-16
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection
Dual Bandpass Filters
3 Sector, 2 Carrier Maximum
1B
1A
2B
2A
1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC
2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC
3-3A 3064735A07 3 SEC
Add the following
cables for 2nd Carrier
1-1B 3064735A11 3 SEC
2-2B 3064735A07 3 SEC
3-3B 3064735A07 3 SEC
3B
3A
COMBINER CAGE
3B
2B
1B
3A
2A
1A
FW00704
DRDCs
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-17
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection
2 to 1 Combiners
2 Carrier - 6 Sector
4-4A 3064735A12 6 SEC
5-5A 3064735A11 6 SEC
6-6A 3064735A07 6 SEC
* FOR 3 SECTOR-4 CARRIER
Connect Combiner 4 to 1B
Combiner 5 to 2B
Combiner 6 to 3B
1-1A 3064735A11 3/6 SEC
2-2A 3064735A07 3/6 SEC
3-3A 3064735A07 3/6 SEC
COMBINER CAGE
3B
2B
1B
3A
2A
1A
6B
5B
4B
6A
5A
4A
FW00705
DRDCs
H-18
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection
4 to 1 Combiners
3 Sector
1A
1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC
2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC
3-3A 3064735A07 3 SEC
2A
3A
COMBINER CAGE
3B
2B
1B
3A
2A
1A
6B
5B
4B
6A
5A
4A
FW00706
DRDCs
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-19
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection
Dual Bandpass Filter
6 Sector - 1 or 2 Carrier
4B
1-1B 3064735A11 6 Sec
2-2B 3064735A07 6 Sec
3-3B 3064735A07 6 Sec
4A
1B
1A
5B
5A
2B
2A
6B
6A
3B
3A
1-1A 3064735A11 6 Sec
2-2A 3064735A07 6 Sec
3-3A 3064735A07 6 Sec
4-4B 3064735A12 6 Sec
5-5B 3064735A11 6 Sec
6-6B 3064735A07 6 Sec
4-4A 3064735A12 6 Sec
5-5A 3064735A11 6 Sec
6-6A 3064735A07 6 Sec
COMBINER CAGE
3B
2B
1B
3A
6B
5B
4B
6A
2A
5A
1A
4A
FW00707
DRDCs
H-20
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
MPC Functional Description
The MPC card provides (see Figure H-15) low-noise amplification for
all RX path signals. The low noise, high gain design improves frame RX
sensitivity and overcomes the splitting loss in the receive path. DC
voltages are monitored on the RF devices and regulators and are used to
generate hard and soft alarms. The MPC is not redundant at the
card-level, but includes dual-path amplifiers which provide soft-fail
redundancy for all sectors.
MPC to DRDC Cabling
The cables connecting the MPC cards to the DRDCs for a three sector
RF cabinet are shown in Figure H-15. A six sector RF cabinet would
have six more DRDC’s and they would be connected to the front of the
MPC cards.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-21
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections
MPC BOARDS
SC 4812ET
RF Cabinet
ETIB
EBA
RFDS
5 RU RACK
SPACE
CABLES CONNECT
1A, 2A, 3A TO TOP
MPC BOARD
# 3086659H01
CABLES CONNECT
1B, 2B, 3B TO
BOTTOM MPC BOARD
# 3086659H01
1A - 3A: CABLE # 3086659H01
1B - 3B: CABLE # 3086659H01
3B
2B
1B
3A
2A
1A
* Use Cable 3086659H02
For Sectors 4 - 6
DRDC CAGE
H-22
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
FW00710
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
RFDS Cabling Details
Figure H-16 shows the components of the RFDS. Table H-2 depicts the
cabling for a 3-Sector Duplexed configuration and Table H-3 depicts the
cabling for a 6-Sector Duplexed configuration. Figure H-17 shows the
connection of the RFDS to the BTS combiners.
Figure H-16: RFDS Component Identification
HANDLE
FWTIC
AMR BUS/POWER
Cable #
3064794A05 CONNECTOR (LR485)
(See Figure H-9)
ASU2
SUBSCRIBER
UNIT ASSEMBLY
ASU1
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Å
MCX CABLE DETAIL
(See Figure H-17)
P2
REFL/ANT PORTS 1
THROUGH 6
(See Figure H-17)
MCX
CONNECTOR
TO ASU
P3
FWD/BTS PORTS
1 THROUGH 6
(See Figure H-17)
SMA CONNECTORS
TO DRDC BTS OR
ANT PORTS
KNURLED
LOCK
SCREWS
CONNECTS to P2 AND
P3 OF ASU1 AND ASU2
FW00217-REF
Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table
DRDC Label
1A BTS
1B BTS
2A BTS
2B BTS
3A BTS
3B BTS
1A ANT
1B ANT
2A ANT
2B ANT
3A ANT
3B ANT
Aug 2002
Directional Coupler Port
ASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX)
Sector 1 Main BTS
Sector 1 Diversity BTS
Sector 2 Main BTS
Sector 2 Diversity BTS
Sector 3 Main BTS
Sector 3 Diversity BTS
ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX)
Sector 1 Main ANT
Sector 1 Diversity ANT
Sector 2 Main ANT
Sector 2 Diversity ANT
Sector 3 Main ANT
Sector 3 Diversity ANT
Cobra RFDS Port
ASU1-FWD
ASU1-FWD
ASU1-FWD
ASU1-FWD
ASU1-FWD
ASU1-FWD
BTS-1
BTS-2
BTS-3
BTS-4
BTS-5
BTS-6
ASU1-REF
ASU1-REF
ASU1-REF
ASU1-REF
ASU1-REF
ASU1-REF
ANT-1
ANT-2
ANT-3
ANT-4
ANT-5
ANT-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-23
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table
DRDC Label
Directional Coupler Port
Cobra RFDS Port
ASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX)
1A BTS
Sector 1 Main BTS
ASU1-FWD BTS-1
1B BTS
Sector 1 Diversity BTS
ASU1-FWD BTS-2
2A BTS
Sector 2 Main BTS
ASU1-FWD BTS-3
2B BTS
Sector 2 Diversity BTS
ASU1-FWD BTS-4
3A BTS
Sector 3 Main BTS
ASU1-FWD BTS-5
3B BTS
Sector 3 Diversity BTS
ASU1-FWD BTS-6
ASU 2 - FWD (six pack MCX)
4A BTS
Sector 4 Main BTS
ASU2-FWD BTS-1
4B BTS
Sector 4 Diversity BTS
ASU2-FWD BTS-2
5A BTS
Sector 5 Main BTS
ASU2-FWD BTS-3
5B BTS
Sector 5 Diversity BTS
ASU2-FWD BTS-4
6A BTS
Sector 6 Main BTS
ASU2-FWD BTS-5
6B BTS
Sector 6 Diversity BTS
ASU2-FWD BTS-6
ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX)
1A ANT
Sector 1 Main ANT
ASU1-REF ANT-1
1B ANT
Sector 1 Diversity ANT
ASU1-REF ANT-2
2A ANT
Sector 2 Main ANT
ASU1-REF ANT-3
2B ANT
Sector 2 Diversity ANT
ASU1-REF ANT-4
3A ANT
Sector 3 Main ANT
ASU1-REF ANT-5
3B ANT
Sector 3 Diversity ANT
ASU1-REF ANT-6
ASU 2 - REF (six pack MCX)
4A ANT
Sector 4 Main ANT
ASU2-REF ANT-1
4B ANT
Sector 4 Diversity ANT
ASU2-REF ANT-2
5A ANT
Sector 5 Main ANT
ASU2-REF ANT-3
5B ANT
Sector 5 Diversity ANT
ASU2-REF ANT-4
6A ANT
Sector 6 Main ANT
ASU2-REF ANT-5
6B ANT
Sector 6 Diversity ANT
ASU2-REF ANT-6
H-24
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection
BTS COUPLED
TO RFDS ASU 1
(See Figure H-16)
ANT COUPLED
TO RFDS ASU 1
(See Figure H-16)
BTS COUPLED
TO RFDS ASU 2
(See Figure H-16)
3B
2B
1B
3A
6B
5B
4B
6A
2A
5A
TO RFDS
ASU1 & ASU2
1A
4A
DRDC CAGE
FW00709
ANT COUPLED
TO RFDS ASU 2
(See Figure H-16)
50 Pair Punchblock
The 50 pair punchblock is the main interface point for RGPS, span lines,
customer I/O, Power Cabinet alarm lines, and the modem. The
punchblock provides primary protection for all lines. Refer to
Figure H-18 and Table H-4 for punchblock pin-out.
CAUTION
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C is
swapped
- On the SC4812ET’s, the span cabel internal to the base station
that connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU has
Span B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled.
- CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock as
per Motorola documentation and punchdown chart. When conecting the span input to the CSU re-label “Span B” cable
to”Span C” cable to “Span B”. Connect to CSU as per documentation
- Note: The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to the
CSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected on
revision “D” to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. D
will be approximately January 30, 2001.
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-25
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
CAUTION
A wiring discrepancy exists between the manuals and the frame
for remote GPS.
- The TX and RX are reversed in the ETIB, leading to inoperability of the RGPS. The RGPS will not work in either a single
standalone or multiple frame configuration.
- Swap the White and White/Bk wires to punch pins 44T and
44R. The Green and Green/Bk go to 45T and 45R. This will
correct non-expansion configurations.
- Single frame and expansion BTSs without RGPS can use this
workaround as a permanent solution.
- For expansion with RGPS required a new cable (P/N
3086433H10 ) will correct the problem.
H-26
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Figure H-18: 50 Pair Punchblock
TO MODEM
CONNECTOR TO ALARMS
CONNECTOR
STRAIN RELIEVE
INCOMING CABLE TO
BRACKET WITH TIE WRAPS
TO SPAN
CONNECTOR
RF Cabinet I/O Area
TO RGD/RGPS
CONNECTOR
TOP VIEW OF
PUNCH BLOCK
2R
2T
LEGEND
1T = PAIR 1 - TIP
1R = PAIR 1 -RING
”
”
”
”
”
”
1R
1T
SeeTable H-4
for Pin-Out.
49T
49R
50T
1T 1R 2T 2R
50R
FW00162-REF
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-27
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information
Table H-4 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pin
punch block.
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
Signal Name
Power Cabinet
ALARM
HSO/LFR
Extension
LFR Antenna
Pilot Beacon
Punch Pin
Function
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
Power Cab Control - NC
1T
Blue
Power Cab Control - NO
1R
Blk/Blue
Power Cab Control-Com
2T
Yellow
Reserved
2R
N/C
Rectifier Fail
3T
Blk/Yellow
AC Fail
3R
Green
Power Cab Exchanger Fail
4T
Blk/Grn
Power Cab Door Alarm
4R
White
Power Cab Major Alarm
5T
Blk/White
Battery Over Temp
5R
Red
Power Cab Minor Alarm
6T
Blk/Red
Reticifier Over Temp
6R
Brown
Power Cab Alarm Rtn
7T
Blk/Brn
LFR_HSO_GND
7R
EXT_1PPS_POS
8T
EXT_1PPS_NEG
8R
CAL_+
9T
CAB_-
9R
LORAN_+
10T
LORAN_-
10R
Pilot Beacon Alarm - Minor
11T
Pilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn
11R
Pilot Beacon Alarm - Major
12T
Pilot Beacon Control-NO
12R
Pilot Beacon Control - COM
13T
Pilot Beacon Control - NC
13R
. . . continued on next page
H-28
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
ALARM
ALARM
Signal Name
Punch Pin
Function
Customer Outputs
Customer Inputs
Customer Outputs 1 - NO
14T
Customer Outputs 1 - COM
14R
Customer Outputs 1 - NO
14T
Customer Outputs 1 - COM
14R
Customer Outputs 1 - NC
15T
Customer Outputs 2 - NO
15R
Customer Outputs 2 - COM
16T
Customer Outputs 2 - NC
16R
Customer Outputs 3 - NO
17T
Customer Outputs 3 - COM
17R
Customer Outputs 3 - NC
18T
Customer Outputs 4 - NO
18R
Customer Outputs 4-COM
19T
Customer Outputs 4 - NC
19R
Customer Inputs 1
20T
Cust_Rtn_A_1
20R
Customer Inputs 2
21T
Cust_Rtn_A_2
21R
Customer Inputs 3
22T
Cust_Rtn_A_3
22R
Customer Inputs 4
23T
Cust_Rtn_A_4
23R
Customer Inputs 5
24T
Cust_Rtn_A_5
24R
Customer Inputs 6
25T
Cust_Rtn_A_6
25R
Customer Inputs 7
26T
Cust_Rtn_A_7
26R
Customer Inputs 8
27T
Cust_Rtn_A_8
27R
Customer Inputs 9
28T
Cust_Rtn_A_9
28R
Customer Inputs 10
29T
Cust_Rtn_A_10
29R
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-29
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
Signal Name
Punch Pin
Function
Span 1
Span 2
Span 3
SPAN I/O
Span 4
Span 5
Span 6
RCV_TIP_A
30T
RCV_RING_A
30R
XMIT_TIP_A
31T
XMIT_RING_A
31R
RCV_TIP_B
32T
RCV_RING_B
32R
XMIT_TIP_B
33T
XMIT_RING_B
33R
RCV_TIP_C (Note)
34T
RCV_RING_C (Note)
34R
XMIT_TIP_C (Note)
35T
XMIT_RING_C(Note)
35R
RCV_TIP_D (Note)
36T
RCV_RING_D (Note)
36R
XMIT_TIP_D (Note)
37T
XMIT_RING_D(Note)
37R
RCV_TIP_E (Note)
38T
RCV_RING_E (Note)
38R
XMIT_TIP_E (Note)
39T
XMIT_RING_E(Note)
39R
RCV_TIP_F (Note)
40T
RCV_RING_F (Note)
40R
XMIT_TIP_F (Note)
41T
XMIT_RING_F(Note)
41R
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
NOTE
Span 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes
. . . continued on next page
H-30
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock
Cable
Connector
Signal Name
Punch Pin
Function
Ext. Cable Wire
Color
GPS_Power_A
42T
Yellow
GPS_Power_A_Return
42R
Yellow/Black
GPS_Power_B
43T
Blue
GPS_Power_B_Return
43R
Blue/Black
GPS_TXD+
44T
White
GPS_TXD-
44R
White/Black
GPS_RXD+
45T
Green
GPS_RXD-
45R
Green/Black
Signal Ground (TDR+)
46T
Red
Signal Ground (TDR-)
46R
Red/Black
GPS_1PPS+
47T
Brown
GPS_1PPS-
47R
Brown/Black
GPS_Power_A
42T
Yellow
GPS_Power_A_Return
42R
Yellow/Black
GPS_Power_B
43T
Blue
GPS_Power_B_Return
43R
Blue/Black
GPS_TXD+
44T
White
GPS_TXD-
44R
White/Black
GPS_RXD+
45T
Green
GPS_RXD-
45R
Green/Black
Signal Ground (TDR+)
46T
Red
Master Frame (TDR-)
46R
Red/Black
GPS_1PPS+
47T
Brown
GPS_1PPS-
47R
Brown/Black
Reserved
48T
MODEM
Reserved
48R
RGD/RGPS
Chassis Ground
49T
N/A
None
No Connection
49R
None
Reserved
50T
None
Reserved
50R
None
RGD/RGPS
RGD/RGPS
ALARM
Aug 2002
For frame
without RGD
Expansion
Punchblock
Single Frame
BTS;RGPS Head
Connection
OR
Multiple Frame
BTS; RGD
Connection at
RGPS Secondary
Frame
For frame with
RGD Expansion
Punchblock
OR
Multiple Frame
BTS; RGPS Head
Connection at
RGPS Primary
Frame
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
H-31
Intra-Cabinet Cabling
68P09255A57-2
RF Cabinet Parts Locator
Figure H-19 illustrates the location of door switch interlocks, DC Power
distribution and the EBA blower assembly.
Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts Locator
INDEX:
1. Door Switch
2. Door Switch (Main)
3. DC Power Distribution
4. EBA Blower Assembly
FW00440-REF
H-32
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Appendix I
GPIB Addressing
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
I-1
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
GPIB
GPIB Introduction
Use the procedures in this appendix to verify and/or change the GPIB
addresses of the applicable test equipment.
HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address
Follow the steps in Table I-1 to verify and, if necessary, change the
HP437 GPIB address.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table I-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address
Step
Action
Press Shift and PRESET (see Figure I-1).
Use the arrow key to navigate to HP-IB ADRS and press ENTER.
The HP-IB address is displayed.
NOTE
HP-IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:
- Use the
arrow keys to change the HP-IB ADRS to 13.
- Press ENTER to set the address.
Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration.
Figure I-1: HP437 Power Meter
PRESET
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
ENTER
REF FW00308
I-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address
Follow the steps in Table I-2 to verify and, if necessary, change the
Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table I-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
Press MENU (see Figure I-2).
Use the
Use the arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.
The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.
If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:
Use the
arrow keys as required to select MODE.
Use the
arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.
If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:
Use the arrow key to select ADDRESS.
Use the
arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.
Press ENTER to return to normal operation.
arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.
Figure I-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail
MENU
ENTER
ARROW
KEYS
REF FW00564
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
I-3
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address
Follow the steps in Table I-3 to verify and, if necessary, change the
GPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB address
requires the following items:
 Motorola CyberTest communications analyzer
 Computer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95
 Motorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”
 Parallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest)
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table I-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address
Step
Action
On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon to run the CyberTAME
application.
In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.
CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB address. It then will
open the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perform the following
procedure to change it:
- Use the up or down increment arrows, or double-click in the field and type the number.
- Click on the OK button.
The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port and saved.
NOTE
Verify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new address should now appear in
the IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.
HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to verify and, if necessary, change the
HP8935 GPIB address.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
The HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will be
accessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)
To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935 (see
Figure I-3). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP-IB is the same as GPIB.
I-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address
Step
Action
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
- Press Shift and Inst Config.
- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP-IB Adrs field.
- Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.
- Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.
- Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.
 Press Preset to return to normal operation.
Figure I-3: HP8935 Test Set
Preset
Local
Inst Config
Shift
Cursor Control
FW00885
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
I-5
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table I-5 to verify and, if necessary, change the
HP8921A HP83236A GPIB addresses.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table I-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses
Step
Action
To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A (see
Figure I-4). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP-IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current HP-IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.
- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select the
field.
- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.
- Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP-IB address to 18 and press the knob to set the
address.
- Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.
To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows:
- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1
I-6
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Figure I-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B
Local
Preset
Shift
Cursor Control
Advantest R3465 GPIB Address
Table I-6 describes the steps to verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB
address for the Advantest R3465.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table I-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address
Step
Action
To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure:
- Press SHIFT then PRESET (see Figure I-5).
- Press LCL.
- Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
- Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.
- Press the vernier knob to set the address.
To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
I-7
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Figure I-5: R3465 Communications Test Set
GPIB and others
REF UNLOCK
EVEN
SEC/SYNC IN
CDMA
TIME BASE IN
POWER
BNC
“T”
OFF
ON
Vernier
Knob
LCL
Shift
REF FW00337
Preset
RS232 GPIB Interface Box
Ensure that the RS232 GPIB interface box dip switches are set as shown
in Figure I-6.
Figure I-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address
Perform the procedure in Table I-7 and refer to Figure I-7 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIB
address.
I-8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Table I-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Step
Action
If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.
- The LED turns off.
Press the CONFIG key.
- The CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrument
display.
- The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
- Press the GPIB Address softkey.
-- A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument display showing the current
GPIB address.
- Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel.
-- Characters typed on the keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address
entry window.
3a
3b
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one
character at a time.
3c
- Press the ENTR key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address.
-- The GPIB Address entry window closes.
-- The new address is diplayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label.
Figure I-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Softkey Lable
Display Area
Softkey
Buttons
on
REMOTE
LED
LCL Key
CONFIG
Key
Keypad
BS
Key
ENTR
Key
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address
Set the GP-IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562
signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure I-8.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
I-9
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Figure I-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting
GPIB Address set to “1”
GP-IP ADDRESS
5 4 3 2 1
I-10
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table I-8 and refer to Figure I-9 to verify and, if
necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.
Table I-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.
- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
- The softkey labels will change.
- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
3a
- Press the GPIB Address softkey button.
-- In the on-screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by the
current GPIB address.
3b
- On the front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of
18.
-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.
-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the display.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the Bk Sp key at the upper right of the keypad to delete one character at a
time.
3c
- Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.
-- The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.
-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
I-11
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Figure I-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Active Function
Area
Softkey Label
Display Area
System
Key
Softkey
Buttons
Data Entry
Keypad
Bk Sp
Key
Enter
Key
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table I-9 and refer to Figure I-10 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.
Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Step
Action
In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.
- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
- The softkey labels will change.
- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:
3a
- Press the GPIB Address softkey button.
-- The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.
-- In the on-screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the current
GPIB address.
. . . continued on next page
I-12
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Step
3b
Action
- On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.
-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.
-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entry
display.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character at
a time.
3c
- Press the Enter softkey button to set the new GPIB address.
-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.
Figure I-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Active Entry
Area
Softkey Label
Display Area
Utility
Key
Softkey
Buttons
Numeric
Keypad
Backspace
Key
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
I-13
GPIB
68P09255A57-2
Notes
I-14
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Appendix J
Downloading ROM
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
J-1
Downloading ROM Code
68P09255A57-2
Downloading ROM Code
Exception Procedure - Downloading ROM Code
This procedure is not part of a normal optimization.
Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternative
exists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.
NOTE
One GLI must be INS_ACT (bright green) before ROM code
can be downloaded to non-GLI devices.
CAUTION
The correct ROM and RAM codes for the software release used
on the BSS must be loaded into BTS devices. To identify the
correct device ROM and RAM code loads for the software
release being used on the BSS, refer to the Version Matrix
section of the SC CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape
or CD-ROM containing the BSS software).
All devices in a BTS must be loaded with the ROM and RAM
code specified for the software release used on the BSS before
any optimization or ATP procedures can be performed.
If a replacement device is loaded with ROM code which is not
compatible with the BSS software release being used, the device
ROM code can be changed using the LMF before performing the
BTS optimization and ATPs. A device loaded with later release
ROM code can not be converted back to a previous release ROM
code in the field without Motorola assistance
If it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the LMF, the
procedure in Table J-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM code
download using LMF.
Prerequisites
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAM
code files exist in the LMF computer’s applicable lmf home directory
code folder for each of the devices to be loaded.
CAUTION
The Release level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be
the one specified for the software release installed in the BSS.
The release level of the ROM code resident in the other devices
in the BTS must also be correct for the BSS software release
being used. ROM code must not be downloaded to a frame
loaded with code for a BSS software release with which it is not
compatible.
This procedure should only be used to upgrade replacement
devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used to upgrade all devices
in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from R15.x to R16.0, the
upgrade should be done by the OMC-R using the DownLoad
Manager.
J-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Downloading ROM Code
68P09255A57-2
Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices
Step
Action
Click on the device to be loaded.
NOTE
More than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one to
be downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull-down menu, select the device item that applies.
Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, MCC)
From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status.
- A status report window will appear.
Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
NOTE
“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits in
the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file
can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.
Click OK to close the status window.
Click on the device to be loaded.
* IMPORTANT
The LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files must be
selected manually.
From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code Manual.
- A file selection window will appear.
Double-click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file (for
example 2.16.0.x).
Double-click the Code folder.
- A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.
! CAUTION
A ROM code file with the correct HW Bin Type must be chosen. Using a file with the wrong HW Bin
Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.
10
Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Type
number noted in step 3 (for example, file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with a
HW Bin Type of 0604).
- The file should be highlighted.
Click on the Load button.
- A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.
NOTE
If the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, perform
steps 6 through 10 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.
11
Click OK to close the status window.
12
From the LMF window menu bar Tools pull-down menus, select Update NextLoad > CDMA.
13
In the left-hand pane of the window which opens, click on the BTS number for the frame being loaded
(for example, BTS-14 ).
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
J-3
Downloading ROM Code
68P09255A57-2
Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices
Step
Action
14
On the list of versions displayed in the right-hand pane, click the button next to the version number of
the folder that was used for the ROM code download (for example, 2.16.0.x) and click Save.
- A pop-up message will appear showing the CDF has been updated.
15
Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop-up message.
16
Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.
NOTE
RAM code is automatically selected for download.
17
From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code/Data to download RAM
code and dds file data.
- A status report is displayed showing the result of the download.
18
Click OK to close the status window.
19
Observe the downloaded non-GLI device to ensure it is OOS_RAM (yellow).
20
Click on the device which was loaded with code.
21
From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status.
Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window.
Click OK to close the status window.
22
J-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
K
Appendix K
Companion Frame Optimization
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
K-1
Optimizing the Companion Frame
68P09255A57-2
Optimizing the Companion Frame
Optimizing the TX section
The optimization/ATP procedure for the transmit side of the Companion
Frame is identical to that of the SC4812ET BTS.
Table K-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion Frame
Step
Action
Please refer to the TX Optimization/ATP - Chapter 3 of this manual for step-by-step TX
Optimization/ATP instructions for the standalone frame
Run the TX tests.
Figure K-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Ï
Ì
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Ï
Ì
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Ï
Ì
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Ì
Ï
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Ì
Ï
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÌÌ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÌÌ
ÏÏÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÌÌ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÌÌ
ÏÏ
ÌÌÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RX EXPANSION
RX
Ant-1A
C1
TX1
C2
C3
C4
RX1A
RX
Ant-2A
C1
TX2
C2
C3
C4
RX2A
RX
C1
TX3
Ant-3A
C2
C3
C4
RX3A
RX1A
RX2A
RX3A
MPC-A
EMPC-B
1A
2A
3A
1B
2B
3B
SC4812ET Companion
(Starter)
RX
C5
C6
TX1
RX1A
RX
C5
C6
TX2
C7
C8
Ant-2A
RX2A
TX3
Ant-3A
C7
C8
1A
2A
3A
RX
C5
C6
RX3A
MPC-A
RX1A
RX2A
RX3A
EMPC-B
1B
2B
3B
SC4812ET Companion
SURGE
ARRESTORS
K-2
Ant-1A
C7
C8
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
FW00407
Aug 2002
Optimizing the Companion Frame
68P09255A57-2
Optimizing the RX section
RX (Main) Optimization/ATP
To test the RX Main antenna system follow the instructions in Table K-2
and refer to illustration Figure K-1(3-sector configuration).
Table K-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion Frame
Step
Action
Connect the RX test cables to the antenna ports 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) or
antenna ports 1A-6A (for 6-sector optimization).
Login the LMF and select MPC (see Figure K-2 for display screen and field location).
Run the RX tests.
RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Single Frame)
To test the RX Diversity antenna system follow the instructions in
Table K-3.
Table K-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single Frame
Step
Action
Connect the RX test cables to the expansion ports on the I/O plates labeled 1B-3B (for
3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for 6-sector optimization).
Login the LMF under EMPC (see Figure K-2 for display screen and field location).
Run the RX tests.
RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Two Frame)
To test the RX Diversity antenna configuration on a two frame
Companion BTS system follow the instructions in Table K-4.
Table K-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion Site
Step
Action
Connect RX expansion cables from the expansion ports on the other Companion frame
labeled 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1A-6A (for 6-sector
optimization) to the 1B-3B (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for
6-sector optimization) see Figure K-1 for an illustration of the configuration.
NOTE
Connect the cables from the 2nd frame A ports to the B ports of the 1st frame.
Login using the LMF select MPC (see Figure K-2 for field location on LMF display screen)
NOTE
- Although the test will be done to one frame, the RX cable will be connected to the
other frame’s corresponding antenna ports.
- The other frame has to be powered up and include all the RX Path Components.
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
K-3
Optimizing the Companion Frame
68P09255A57-2
Figure K-2: WinLMF Display Screen
K-4
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Index
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Index-1
Index
68P09255A57-2
Numbers
BBX, gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-2
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-12
BBX2, 1-21
2-way Splitter, 1-15
BBX2 Connector, 6-25
3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS
Cabling Table, H-23
BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-43
4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations, H-4
BTS
download, 3-42
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-25
LMF connection, 3-12, 3-24
system software download, 3-3
6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS
Cabling Table, H-24
Broad Band Receiver. See BBX
BTS Cabinet, 1-28
Acceptance Test Procedures ATP , 1-3
BTS directory, create, 3-28
Acronyms, 1-16
Create CAL File, 3-114
ACTIVE LED
GLI, 6-41
MCC, 6-44
C-CCP Backplane, H-7
Advantest R3465, 3-64
GPIB, I-9
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-26
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,
3-8
ALARM LED, GLI, 6-41
Alarm Monitor window, 3-130
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-130
All Cal/Audit Test, 3-113
All inclusive, TX ATP test outline - CCP shelf 1,
primary, 4-18
All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,
RFDS, 6-35
C-CCP shelf, 1-21
cable calibration, automatic, test set-up, 3-72
Advantest R3267/R3562, 3-72
Advantest R3465, 3-71
Agilent 8935, 3-71
Agilent E4406A/E4432B, 3-72
CyberTest, 3-71
HP 8921A, 3-71
Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,
F-4, F-6
Calibrate BLO, 3-98
Calibrating Cables, 3-90
AMR, 1-21
Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS Interface
HP83236B, F-16
Applying AC Power, 2-6
ATP
generate failure report, 4-17
generate report, 4-17
test matrix/detailed optimization, B-3
Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-89
ATP - Reduced, 4-3
Calibration
data file calibration, BLO, 3-100
In-Service, G-18
power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-25
ATP Report, 4-18
Calibration Audit failure, 6-11
ATP Test Procedure, 4-9
calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-100
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-5
Basic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-2
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-4
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-12
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-6, 6-7
Battery Discharge Test, 2-12
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-8
Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-10
Cannot Log into cell-site, 6-3
Index-2
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Index
68P09255A57-2
Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-16
Copy Files from LMF to Diskette, 5-4
Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,
5-4
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-15
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-14
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-13
CCD, 1-21
CCP, shelf 1 - all inclusive TX ATP test outline,
primary, 4-18
CDF
site configuration, 3-3
site equipage verification, 3-4
site type and equipage data information, 2-2
CDF file
create, 3-31
update device load version, 3-32, 3-33
CDMA
allocation diagram for the North American, cellular
telephone frequency spectrum, D-6
optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-2
types configuration, 3-3
DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame), 2-8
DC Power Problems, C-CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-30
Digital Control Problems, 6-27
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-27
Digital Multimeter, 1-14
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
Cell Site Field Engineer CFE, 1-3
Directional Coupler, 1-14
Download
See also Devices
BTS, 3-42
BTS system software, 3-3
Download BLO Procedure, 3-106
Channel Service Unit, 3-6
CIO, 1-21
CIO Connectors, 6-25
CLI, 1-4
Clock Sync Module. See CSM
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels, 4-15
Code Domain Power/Noise, 4-14
Communication test set, rear panel, F-4, F-6
download ROM and RAM code. See ROM code
Download/Enable MCCs, 3-51
Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-45
Duplexer/Directional Coupler DDC, 1-20, 1-21, 1-22,
1-30
Communications System Analyzer, 1-13
Communications system analyzer , 1-13
Components Located on CIO Card, H-11
Enable CSMs & BDCs, 3-49
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-62
Connector Functionality
Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-24
Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-24
Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-4
Aug 2002
Customer I/O, 1-21
CyberTest, 3-64
CyberTest Communication Analyzer, 1-13
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-38
Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-3
Devices, download. See Download
cdpower test, 4-14
Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-19
Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-4
create
BTS directory, 3-28
CDF file, 3-31
master-bts-cdma, 3-28
CSM, 1-21
and LFR primary functions, 3-52
CSM frequency verification, 3-54
CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-39
Equipment Overview, 1-18
Equipment warm-up, 3-68
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-25
transceiver, 1-12
ETIB I/O Connectors, H-13
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Index-3
Index
68P09255A57-2
Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-33
GPS Initialization/Verification
estimated position accuracy, 3-55
surveyed position accuracy, 3-55
GPS satellite system, 3-49
fer test, 4-16
Graphical User Interface Overview , 3-34, 3-35
Files, calibration data file, BLO, 3-100
Group Line Interface. See GLI
Folder Structure Overview, 3-21, 3-23
Foreword, xx
Hardware Requirements, 1-9
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-40
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-15
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-15
High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-14
HP 437B, 3-64
HP 83236A, F-7
Gain set point, C-2
HP 8921, 3-64
General Safety, xxii
HP83236A/B, GPIB, I-7
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-6
HP8921A, F-7
GPIB, I-7
Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-25,
I-4
HP8935, GPIB, I-6
HP8935 Analyzer, 1-13
Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-64
HSO, 1-21
GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) Group
Line Interface
HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-53
GLI Connector, 6-25
GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-25
I and Q values, E-3
GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-41
In-Service Calibration, G-18
GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-42
Initial HP8921A setup, F-16
GLI2, 1-21
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-2
GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators, 6-42
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-5
GPIB, F-3, F-7, F-11
Advantest R3465, I-9
HP83236A/B, I-7
HP8921A, I-7
HP8935, I-6
power meter
Gigatronics 8542B, I-4
HP437B, I-3
set address, Motorola CyberTest, I-5
Installation and Update Procedures, 3-16
GPIB Cables, 1-13
GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-7
LAN, BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-25
Index-4
Intercabinet I/O, 1-22
Internal FRU, 1-29
Internal FRUs, 1-20
IS-97 specification, E-3
ISB Inter Shelf Bus connectors, 6-24
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Index
68P09255A57-2
LED Status Combinations for all Modules except
GLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-37
Motorola, SC9600 Base Transceiver Subsystem, 1-2
LFR, 1-21
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-8
Multi Channel Card. See MCC
MPC, 1-21
Multi-FER test Failure, 6-17
Line Build Out parameters
configure, 5-8
verify, 5-6
New Installations, 1-6
LMF, F-3, F-11
to BTS connection, 3-12, 3-24
view CDF information, 3-4
No AMR control, 6-28
No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-28
LMF Removal, 5-12
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-30
Load Center Wiring, 2-5
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-31
Local Area Network (LAN) Tester, 1-15
No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-27
Log into the BTS, 3-27
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-27
Log into the LMF, 3-27
No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-29
Logging In to a BTS, 3-36
No or missing span line traffic, 6-28
Logging Out, 3-39
LORAN-C Initialization/Verification, 3-60
North American, cellular telephone system frequency
spectrum, CDMA allocation, D-6
LPA errors, 6-9
Null modem cable detail, 1-12
LPA Module LED, 6-45
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-45
Online Help, 1-4
LPAC Interface Board, H-12
Optimization, 1-3
MMI common connections, 3-41
optimization/ATP, test set-up, 3-76
Advantest R3267/R3562
DRDCs, 3-79
TRDCs, 3-81
Advantest R3465, 3-76
Agilent 8935
DRDCs, 3-78
TRDCs, 3-80
Agilent E4406A/E4432B
DRDCs, 3-78
TRDCs, 3-80
CyberTest, 3-76
HP 8921A, 800 MHz, 3-77
HP 8921A, 1.9 GHz, 3-77
MMI Connection, 3-41
Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, 1-6
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-40
GLI, 6-42
Optional Test Equipment, 1-15
major components, 1-19
Manual, layout, 1-2
Master Group Line Interface. See MGLI
MASTER LED, GLI, 6-41
master-bts-cdma directory, create, 3-28
MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-44
MCC/CE, 4-14
MGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-7
Optional test equipment, frequency counter, 1-15
MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-44
Oscilloscope, 1-15
MMI equipment setup, 3-41
Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit, 1-13
Pilot Time Offset. See PN
Module status indicators, 6-36
Ping, 3-25
Aug 2002
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Index-5
Index
68P09255A57-2
PN
offset programming information, E-2
offset usage, E-3
PWR/ALM LED
BBX2, 6-43
CSM, 6-39
DC/DC Converter, 6-38
generic, 6-37
MCC, 6-44
MPC and EMPC Card, H-21
PN offset per sector, E-3
PN Offset Usage , E-3
Power Delta Calibration
Advantest, G-7
HP8921A, G-4
HP8935, G-10
Power Input, 6-24
Power Meter, 1-13
illustration, F-23, I-3
Pre-calibration, F-23
Power meter
calibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-25
GPIB
Gigatronics 8542B, I-4
HP437B, I-3
illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-25, I-4
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-24
Pre-calibration, Power Meter, F-23
Pre-power tests, test data sheets, A-5
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-2
test data sheets, A-4
Prepare to Leave the Site
External test equipment removal, 5-2
LMF Removal, 5-12
Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-13
Verify T1/E1, 5-13
Prepare to leave the site
re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-11
re-connect BTS T1 spans, 5-11
Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the
CBSC, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7
Product Description, 1-4
Pseudorandom Noise. See PN
ptoff test, 4-13
Punch Block, 3-8
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-44
Index-6
RAM code, described, 3-42
Re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-11
Re-connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-11
Receive Distribution Card RXDC, 1-30
Reduced ATP, 4-3
Reduced ATP passes but forward link problem
prevails, 6-12
Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-13
Removing and Installing LPAs for the SC 4812ET,
H-8
Required documents, 1-7, 1-29
Required Test Equipment
Ethernet LAN transceiver, 1-12
substitute equipment, 1-8
RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-42
Resetting BTS modules, 5-3
Revision History, xxiv
RF Adapters, 1-14
RF Attenuators, 1-14
50 Pair Punchblock, H-27
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-97
RF Test Cable, 1-15
RFDS Cabling Details, H-23
RFDS calibration
description, 3-125
procedure, 3-126
RFDS FRU, H-15
RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-24
RFDS parameters, 3-116
checking, 3-117
setting, 3-117
RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-43
RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-125
rho test, 4-12
ROM code
described, 3-42
downloading, J-2, K-2, K-3
procedure, J-3
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Index
68P09255A57-2
RS-232 to GPIB Interface, 1-12
Rubidium Standard Timebase, 3-64
T1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-5, 3-14
RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-18
Telco Interface Board TIB, 1-30
RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-34
Test data sheets
Alarm verification, A-19
general optimization checklist, A-6
GPS receiver operation, A-7
initial power tests, A-5
LFR receiver operation, A-8
pre-power tests, A-5
preliminary operations, A-4
RX antenna VSWR, A-18
SCLPA convergence, A-9
site checklist, A-3
TX antenna VSWR, A-16
TX BLO, A-10, A-15
verification of test equipment used, A-2
SC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, B-4
SC 4812ET BTS Combiner, H-9, H-10, H-17, H-18,
H-19, H-20, H-22, H-23, H-25
SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-9
Selecting Test Equipment, 3-85
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-123
Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-124
Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-8
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-94
Test equipment, verification data sheets, A-2
Setting Control Port, 3-6
Test equipment connections , F-3
preliminary Agilent E4406A/E4432B set-up, F-15
Setting Coupler Loss Value, 3-95
Test Equipment Policy, 1-8
SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-7
Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay Level
Offset, 3-93, F-20
SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, C-2
Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-66
Site, equipage verification, 3-4
Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-103
Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-3
Timing Reference Cables, 1-13
site equippage, CDF file, 3-3
Transmit TX path audit, 3-109
Site Specific BTS Files, 3-28
Transmit TX path calibration, 3-104
Span Framing Format
configure, 5-8
verify, 5-6
Transmit/Receive Module TRX, 1-29
SPAN I/O Functional Description, Introduction, H-14
Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment, 1-15
Span Line connector , 6-24
Span Parameter Configuration
set, procedure, 5-8
verification, procedure, 5-6
Span Problems no control link, Troubleshooting, 6-46
SPANS LED, 6-41
Spectrum Analyzer, 1-15
Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-64
STATUS LED, GLI, 6-41
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-40
System Connectivity Test, F-7
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting
DC Power Problems, 6-30
Span Problems no control link, 6-46
Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed
Reduced ATP), 6-12
TSU NAM, programming
description, 3-120
parameter ranges, 3-122
parameters, 3-121
procedure, 3-128
TX
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16, A-19
BLO test data sheets, A-10, A-15
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , D-4
TX Audit Test, 3-110
TX Bay Level Offset and TX ATP test equipment
setup calibration, 3-92
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Index-7
Index
68P09255A57-2
TX calibration, set-up, 3-73
Advantest R3267, 3-75
Advantest R3465, 3-74
Agilent 8935, 3-73
Agilent E4406A, 3-75
CyberTest, 3-73
HP 8921A, 3-74
tx fine adjust, E-3
Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-44
TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,
illustration, 4-11
Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-6
TX Output Acceptance Tests - Introduction
Code domain power, 4-8
Pilot time offset, 4-8
Spectral purity TX mask, 4-8
Waveform Quality (rho), 4-8
TX Path Calibration, 3-99
XCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-24
TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-5
txmask test, 4-10
Index-8
Updating CDMA LMF Files, 5-4
Verify, test equipment used, test data sheets, A-2
Walsh channels, 4-14
Xircom Model PE3-10B2, LMF to BTS connection,
3-24
SC4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x
PRELIMINARY
Aug 2002
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.2
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2002:08:23 14:15:42
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2002:08:23 14:15:45-05:00
Page Count                      : 368
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: IHET6EQ1

Navigation menu